department of recycling and solid waste

PROJECT MANUAL

OUTAGAMIE COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF RECYCLING AND SOLID WASTE

MATERIAL RECOVERY FACILITY EXPANSION

LITTLE CHUTE, WISCONSIN

M&E PROJECT NO. 1-0915-005

FEBRUARY 23, 2021

PROJECT MANUAL

OUTAGAMIE COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF SOLID WASTE AND RECYCLING

MATERIAL RECOVER FACILITY EXPANSION

Little Chute, Wisconsin

PROJECT TEAM

OWNER REPRESENTATIVE

OUTAGAMIE COUNTY SOLID WASTE AND RECYCLING 1419 Holland Road – Appleton, Wisconsin 54911

Mr. Jeff Tetzlaff, Maintenance Supervisor PH 920.832.2169 / [email protected]

ARCHITECT / CIVIL ENGINEER

MARTENSON & EISELE INC.

1377 Midway Road – Menasha, Wisconsin 54952 Mr. Chris Bauknecht AIA, NCARB, Project Architect

PH 920.731.0381 / [email protected]

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

ddk ENGINEERING 6311 Black Wolf Point Road – Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54902

Mr. Dave Kampe, PE PH 920.688.5546 / [email protected]

PLUMBING / HVAC / FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER

FACILITY ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LLC

2301 Riverside Drive, Suite 13 – Green Bay, Wisconsin 54301 Mr. Dale Pearson, PE

PH 920.445.0430 / [email protected]

ELECTRICAL DESIGNER

MIDWEST DESIGN SOLUTIONS, LLC. 2676 Bay Settlement Road – Green Bay, Wisconsin 54311

Mr. Harland Matthews, DES PH 920.471.0805 / [email protected]

Outagamie County Department of Solid Waste and Recycling M&E Project No. 1-0915-005 Material Recovery Facility Expansion

000110 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 00 COVER SHEET 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 50 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 41 00 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 MASONRY

04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 13 METAL PAN STAIRS 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH FRAMING

DIVISION 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 26 00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS


000110 - 2

07 53 23 ETHYLENE-PROPOYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 81 00 APPLIED FIRE PROTECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23.13 OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS

DIVISION 21 FIRE PROTECTION

21 10 00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 10 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 11 00 FACILITY FUEL PIPING SYSTEMS 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 00 HVAC FANS 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 74 00 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 81 29 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


000110 - 3

26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 72 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY 26 05 74 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 22 13 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 29 13.03 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 51 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 52 19 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 28.29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES

DIVISION 40 PROCESS PIPING

40 12 00 COMPRESSED AIR PROCESS PIPING

DIVISION 41 MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 22 23 HOISTS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled “Outagamie County Department of Recycling and Solid Waste – Material Recovery Facility Expansion”, dated February 23, 2021, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

B. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated:

1. G1.0 COVER SHEET 2. G1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION 3. C1.1 SITE COVER SHEET 4. C2.1 SITE PLAN / DRAINAGE 5. C3.1 DEMOLITION PLAN 6. C4.1 STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS 7. A0.1 EXISTING PLAN 8. A0.2 DEMOLITION PLANS 9. A1.1 OVERALL NEW FLOOR PLAN 10. A1.2 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS 11. A1.3 ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS 12. A2.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 13. A3.1 BUILDING SECTION 14. A3.2 BUILDING SECTION 15. A3.3 BUILDING SECTION 16. A3.4 BUILDING SECTION 17. A4.1 DETAILS 18. A5.1 DOOR TYPES AND ROOM FINISHES 19. S1.1 STRUCTURAL NOTES SCHEDULES DETAILS 20. S2.1 FOUNDATION MEZZANINE ROOF PLANS 21. S2.2 ELECTRICAL ROOM MODIFICATIONS 22. S3.1 STRUCTURAL DETAILS 23. S3.2 WALL PANEL MODIFICATION 24. P1 FLOOR PLANS PLUMBING FIRE PROTECTION 25. M.0 DEMOLITION PLAN AND NOTES 26. M1 FLOOR PLANS MECHANICAL 27. E1.1 ELECTRICAL – DEMOLITION PLAN 28. E2.1 ELECTRICAL – LIGHTING PLAN 29. E2.2 ELECTRICAL – EMERGENCY LIGHTING PLAN 30. E2.3 ELECTRICAL – POWER/SYSTEMS PLAN 31. E3.1 ELECTRICAL – SYMBOLS AND DETAILS 32. E3.2 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS 33. E3.3 ELECTRICAL – SCHEDULES

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 15


011000 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project:

Material Recovery Facility Expansion Outagamie County Department of Solid Waste and Recycling Little Chute, Wisconsin

B. Owner Representative:

Outagamie County Solid Waste and Recycling 1419 Holland Road – Appleton, Wisconsin 54911 Mr. Jeff Tetzlaff, Maintenance Supervisor

C. Architect Representative:

Martenson & Eisele, Inc. 1377 Midway Road – Menasha, Wisconsin 54952 Mr. Chris Bauknecht, AIA, NCARB, Project Architect

D. The Work consists of construction of a 2,502 square foot, single story addition with mezzanine, and the alteration of 400 square feet of space within the existing facility to be bid under a Single Prime Stipulated Sum Contract with Alternates:

1. Site Work: Staking and Layout, site clearing, grading, excavation, erosion and

sedimentation control, stormwater piping, concrete paving and repair/seeding of turf.

2. Concrete and Masonry: Footings, foundations, slab-on-grade, concrete masonry, concrete mezzanine in steel deck, removal and relocation of precast wall panels, new precast wall panels, interior concrete push walls, caulking control joints, cleaning and sealing of masonry.

3. General Building Construction: Final cleaning, structural steel, steel stud framing, fascia, scuppers and downspouts, ballasted EPDM roofing, fascia gutters and downspouts, caulking and sealants, hollow metal doors and frames, coiling overhead doors, steel handrails and guardrails, steel stair assembly, fire extinguishers and lockers.

4. Plumbing and Fire Protection Construction: Sink waste and water piping, eyewash station waste and water piping, floor drain. Extension of fire protection system and relocation of test header and FDC.

5. HVAC Construction: Removal and relocation of air compressors, removal of unit heaters, fans and piping, new roof top unit at building addition, new ductwork and piping at building addition.


011000 - 2

6. Electrical, Data and Voice Construction: Demolition of various receptacles, switches, lighting and other items as noted. Provide new switchgear and disconnect and remove existing. New lighting, panels, receptacles and switches. Relocation of existing data room to new building addition.

E. Owner-Furnished Items: The following products and/or services will be furnished and/or installed by Owner and as part of the Work or under separate Contract with Owner:

1. Signage. 2. Furnishings, appliances and equipment. 3. Data, Voice and Security equipment as noted. 4. Concrete and Soil Testing.

F. Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed Items: The following products and/or services will be furnished by the Owner and Installed by the Contractor:

1. None.

1.2 ALTERNATES

A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidder for certain work that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner accepts the Alternate. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

B. Indicate on the Bid Form amounts to be deducted from or added to the Contract Sum for the following alternates:

1. Alternate Bid No. 1: Omit data move. The existing cabling and racks currently in the

closet beneath the stairs (identified by Plan Note 27 on Sheet E1.1) shall remain operational in the present location. Omit Plan Notes 11, 12, 13 and 14 from Sheet E2.3. Omit Plan Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 from Sheet E3.2.

2. Alternate Bid No. 2: Omit new switchgear. Existing 2000A main service panel (identified by Plan Note 19 on Sheet E1.1) shall remain in place and operational. Omit “New Panel MDP” from Room 102 in the building addition.

3. Alternate Bid No. 3: Omit air compressor relocation. The five existing air

compressors, air receiver and associated piping and components identified on Sheet M.0 to be removed and relocated to Room 203 in the building addition shall stay operational in their present locations.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. A unit price is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form as a price per unit of measurement for work added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. Bidders shall indicate on the Bid Form unit prices for the following items of Work:


011000 - 3

1. No Unit Prices.

B. Unit prices include all necessary material plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead and profit.

1.4 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Contractor's Use of Premises: Owner will occupy and conduct business within the existing building area during demolition and construction operations. Contractor shall schedule with Architect and Owner phasing of project to maintain Owner occupancy and business to the greatest extent possible.

1. Install temporary partitions to keep dust from remainder of facility. 2. Provide minimum 24-hours notice of any changes to phasing plan. 3. Maintain parking lot, scale lanes, driveways and emergency egress clear at all times.

a. Contractors shall park vehicles and stage work at locations designated by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00


013000 - 1

SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. General Contractor to coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

B. General Contractor to schedule and conduct Pre-Construction Meeting at the Project Site with required attendance by Owner, Architect and all sub-contractors. Meeting shall be purposed to review Contractor’s job-site policies, schedule, working hours as well as review Owner occupancy and working hour requirements, phasing of work and other items.

1. Record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect.

C. General Contractor to schedule and conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities. Owner and Architect Representative shall be invited to attend.

1. Record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect.

1.2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. Per Owner’s Request for Bids, Contract and General Conditions.

1.3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES


1.4 SALES TAX


1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 10 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:


013000 - 2

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice of Award.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity and submit to Construction Manager.

1. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

2. Submit three copies of each submittal. Construction Manager will return one copy. 3. Construction Manager will return submittals, without review, received from sources other

than Contractor.

B. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and


013000 - 3

approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on the label:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier. 5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

C. Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

D. Provide (1) electronic copy of each submittal with indication that General Contractor has reviewed the submittal prior to submitting to Architect.

1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation instructions.

2. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 3. Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams. 4. Testing by recognized testing agency. 5. Compliance with specified standards and requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. Include the following:

1. Dimensions and identification of products. 2. Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams. 3. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Include name of manufacturer and product name on label.

1.8 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.


013000 - 4

1.9 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit to Architect five copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional including, but not limited to, shop-fabricated trusses.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED



015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 – EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local codes and ordinances in force at the project site.

2. Apply, obtain and pay for required local and regional building permits and fees to legally execute the Work of this Contract.

B. References and Standards:

1. For products or workmanship specified by association, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more stringent requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by code.

3. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. 4. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request and

receive, in writing, clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Contractor Quality Assurance and Requirements: 1. Contractor shall take complete charge of the work under this contract and coordinate the

work of all trades on the project. 2. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions

and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions including each step in sequence. 4. Should manufacturer’s instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request and

receive, in writing, clarification from Architect before proceeding. 5. Work shall be performed by persons qualified / certified to product required and specified

quality. 6. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except when more

stringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate a high standard or more precise workmanship.

7. Field verify all measurements prior to placing final orders for supplies and show dimensions on shop drawings for review by Architect.

8. Contractor shall obtain complete data at the site and inspect surfaces that are to receive the Work before proceeding with fabricating, assembling, fitting or erecting the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of measurements and laying out of the work and shall make good any errors or defects to faulty measurements taken, information obtained, or failure to report discrepancies.

9. Contractor shall notify Architect, in writing, in case of discrepancies between existing work and drawings, and defects in such surfaces that are to receive the work. The Architect will evaluate the notice and direct what remedial action will be taken.


015000 - 2

10. Starting of work implies acceptance of existing work or the work of others. Remove and replacement of work applied to defective surfaces in order to correct defects or discrepancies shall be done at the expense of the contractor who applied the work to defective surfaces or did not report such discrepancies prior to start of work.

11. Contractor shall apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer unless specified to the contrary.

D. Cooperate with testing agencies and provide:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of materials for testing, and assistance in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment.

1.2 TEMPORARY FACILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Use Charges: Cost for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.

B. Use permanent water and electric power from Owner as directed without metering and without payment of use charges for project purposes only.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for temporary connections for water and electric power

that do not interfere with Owner’s use of water and electric power for their occupancy and business operations.

2. Promptly remove temporary connections for water and electric power upon completion of activities and restore to condition prior to connection.

C. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

D. Heating and Ventilation Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained heaters with thermostatic control and ventilation fans or humidity control as required.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. General: Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sanitary Facilities: General Contractor to provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.


015000 - 3

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner’s permanent water service available on-site. Arrange with Owner for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

D. Heating and Ventilation: HVAC Sub-Contractor to provide temporary heating and ventilation required for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Electrical Sub-Contractor to provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install temporary electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

F. Telephone Service: Each trade shall have a cellular telephone for use by its foreman / superintendent during construction operations.

1.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES

A. General Contractor to provide field offices, storage and fabrication sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for construction operations.

B. Each contractor shall provide its own lifts and hoists as required for its processes; lifts and hoists are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Coordinate with Owner use of permanent road and paved areas for vehicles and staging. Do not use permanent roads and paved areas not previously approved by Owner.

1. Maintain emergency access to facility at all times; do not block driveways or parking

stalls.

D. Contractor shall remove rubbish, debris and scrap promptly upon its accumulation. Remove at the end of each work day at a minimum. Combustible waste shall be removed immediately or stored in fire-resistive containers until disposed of in an approved manner. 1. In addition to the above, Contractor shall be responsible for the general ‘broom’ cleaning

of the premises governing work under this contract. The contractor shall also perform ‘final cleaning’ of all exposed surfaces to remove all foreign matter, spots, soil, construction dust, etc. so as to put the project in a complete and finished condition ready for acceptance and use intended.

2. If construction operations causing dust or undesirable soil or foreign matter migrate beyond temporary partitions to areas occupied by the Owner, contractor shall immediately, and without cost to the owner, thoroughly clean those areas, change ventilation equipment air filters and return the space to original condition.

3. If rubbish and debris is not removed, or if surfaces are not cleaned as specified above, owner reserves the right to have said work done by others and the related costs will be deducted from monies due to the Contractor.


015000 - 4

E. General Contractor to provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste at on-site facility. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. General Contractor to install project identification and other signs in locations to inform material suppliers, deliveries and construction personnel seeking entrance to Project. Remove signage at substantial completion.

1. Owner will not take deliveries or sign for any deliveries; coordinate with suppliers and

subcontractors to ensure responsible personnel are on-site to take all deliveries. 2. Project signage is not required.

1.5 TEMPORARY SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES

A. Provide temporary environmental protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Protect construction workers, Owner’s personnel and visitors to the site by utilizing

sufficient barricades, guard rails, temporary walkways, appropriate signage of sufficient size and strength necessary for protection and to prevent job-site accidents.

2. Contractor shall be solely responsible for means and methods of construction as well as safety on the job-site.

B. Sitework Contractor shall provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Each Subcontractor shall provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from inclement weather and for containment of heat.

D. Contractor shall surround set-up area and open excavations with a fence and provide additional fences as necessary to meet applicable safety regulations and Owner’s written safety requirements.

E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking on Owner’s property – this site is NO SMOKING; persons found

smoking on-site will be told to leave the premises. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at

project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.


015000 - 5

1.6 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. The term “product” includes the terms “material”, “equipment”, “system”, and terms of similar intent.

B. Product Substitutions: See Section 01 30 00.

C. Provide extended warranties as specified in other sections in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligation under requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Product Options: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

1. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the specifications

establish ‘salient characteristics’ of products.

E. Finish Selection: Unless otherwise indicated, Owner will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from manufacturer’s full range of options that includes both standard and premium items.

F. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Contractor or Contractor’s authorized representative must be present to accept delivery of all equipment and material shipments. The Owner will not knowingly accept, unload or store anything delivered to the site for the Contractor’s use. Inadvertent acceptance of delivered items by any representative or employee of the Owner shall not constitute acceptance or responsibility for any of the materials or equipment. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to assume liability for equipment or material delivered to the job-site.

2. Contractor shall confine equipment, apparatus, storage of materials and operations to limits indicated and agreed to by the Owner at the pre-construction meeting. Contractor shall not bring material onto the site until they are needed for the progress of the work.

3. The storage of materials on the grounds shall be in strict accordance with the instructions stated within the technical sections. Storage of materials on the roof shall at no time exceed the design carrying capacity of the structural system.

4. All hazardous materials including motor fuels shall be properly handled and contained to prevent spills or other releases. The Contractor shall develop and maintain a contingency plan to provide emergency response, containment, and cleanup of spills of hazardous materials resulting from contract activities. All spills and releases shall be reported to the Owner.

5. Contractor shall maintain on-site in a binder available at all times during construction, MSDS sheets of every material brought onto the site or incorporated into the work.


015000 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer’s written requirements including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, plumb, smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; substrates within installation tolerances; and application conditions within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks.

C. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where fabricated products are to be fitted to other construction, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during installation.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.


015000 - 7

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with


015000 - 8

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Do not cut structural members or operational elements without prior written approval of Architect.

B. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

C. Restore or replace any damaged surfaces, items, etc to the Owner and Architect’s satisfaction. Replacements shall match existing in-kind.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage.

B. Clean Project Site and work areas daily, including common areas.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully on-site.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally on-site, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.


015000 - 9

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


015000 - 10

3.10 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

B. Remove temporary facilities and controls no later than Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.



017000 - 1

SECTION 01 70 00 - CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally.

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit one hard copy of manual and one electronic copy. Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and envelopes for folded drawings. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation. 2. Maintenance and service schedules. 3. Maintenance service contracts. 4. Emergency instructions. 5. Spare parts list. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Copies of warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specifications sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon finished floor surfaces.

F. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.


017000 - 2

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General Building Construction Contractor shall complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion:

1. Remove labels that are not permanent. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.

Replace chipped or broken glass. 3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign

substances. Sweep concrete floors broom clean. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication.

Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors. 5. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities.

Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, even-textured surface.

3.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, ensure completion of the following:

1. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities; obtain copies of permits, approvals and provide to Architect.

2. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit specific warranties, maintenance service agreements, and similar documents. 5. Submit Record Drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Submit a request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Compliance Certificate after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected.

C. Request inspection for Final Completion, once the following are complete:

1. Submit a copy of Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.


017000 - 3

D. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

E. Submit a request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Upon successful inspection, Contractor will prepare final Certificate for Payment for review and approval by Architect.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

3.5 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.



024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 4. Contractor’s Option: In lieu of salvage, fully remove and provide new precast structural

concrete.

B. Related Work Includes: 1. Provisions of Division 1 requirements applicable to this Section. 2. Section 034100 – PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. If not otherwise indicated, existing items are not to be removed or demolished.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Predemolition photographs or video: Submit before Work begins.


024119 - 2

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Loose equipment and stored items from existing Maintenance Room and Platform above Maintenance Room.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

2. Notify Owner and Architect, in writing, minimum 48 hours prior to disruption of fire protection facilities and provide necessary precautions during time period that fire protection facilities are not in operation.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


024119 - 3

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSP A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Contact Architect, in writing prior to any demolition activities of suspected structural elements not shown on drawings to be removed, to determine whether removing any such elements might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or videotapes. Provide to Owner or Architect upon request.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner Representative will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.


024119 - 4

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during flame-cutting operations. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly into dumpsters provided by

Contractor to be emptied by Owner upon request.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with drive-through lanes, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used areas of the site. Coordinate with Owner.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:


024119 - 5

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area on-site where designated by Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove demolished materials from immediate Project site and legally dispose of them in EPA-approved landfill adjacent to site.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119


033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Provisions of Division 1 requirements applicable to this Section. 2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-ground.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


033000 - 2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1. 1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI and MCP Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. ACI 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete” 2. MCP – “Manual of Concrete Practice” 3. ACI 318 – “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” 4. ACI 318.1 – “Building Code Requirements for Structural Plain Concrete”

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for a tight fit.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcing in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”


033000 - 3

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Course-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-reinforced concrete

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

D. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Nondissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BASF Corporation

MasterKure CC 160 WB or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A.


033000 - 4

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BASF Corporation MasterKure CC 180 WB or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass. 3. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass, with fly ash or

pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass. 4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 35 percent by mass with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent by mass.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 days): 3,000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 4-inches. 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing high-range water-reducing admixture: 8-

inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump.

B. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 days): 4,000 psi. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. 3. Maximum Slump: 4-inches.


033000 - 5

2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcing according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”

2.11 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches, sealing vapor

retarder to concrete. 4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing

entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps. 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.


033000 - 6

a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect.

2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.

3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with

walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces, or

2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.


033000 - 7

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints:

1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one

side of joint.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301.

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.


033000 - 8

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.

c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity.

d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:

1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material.

a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch. c. Tie holes do not require patching. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D. e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

2. ACI 301Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch. c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.


033000 - 9

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish:

1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel.

2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance.

3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

4. Do not add water to concrete surface. 5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3

percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view 7. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

D. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps as indicated on Drawings

1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

a. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in one or two applications.

b. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. c. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. d. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and

water to expose slip-resistive aggregate.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated.


033000 - 10

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.

1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings. 2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.10 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing. 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h, calculated in accordance with

ACI 305.1, before and during finishing operations.

B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces.

2. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 3. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing

period, as follows:

a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete.

b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply

additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet.

d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.

e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. 2. Interior Concrete Floors:

a. Floors to Receive Curing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.


033000 - 11

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

b. Floors to Receive Curing and Sealing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

3) Repeat process 24 hours later, and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs. 4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. 7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.



034100 - 1

SECTION 034100 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Precast structural concrete.

B. Related Work Includes: 1. Section 024119 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION



B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.

2. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units, including connections at member ends and to adjoining construction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant, Group C.

B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures, testing requirements, and quality-control recommendations for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." Provide certification and documentation upon request.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


034100 - 2

2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design precast structural concrete units.

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and with design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural concrete units indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Select material and minimum thicknesses to provide indicated fire rating.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184/A184M, fabricated from ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A497/A497M or ASTM A1064/A1064M, flat sheet.

F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116.

2.3 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Strand: ASTM A416/A416M, Grade 270, uncoated, seven-wire, low-relaxation strand.


034100 - 3

1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.7 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.7. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin: ASTM C618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120. 5. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, fabricator’s standard product.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C33/C33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5M. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

2.5 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A108, Grade 1010 through 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 116.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.

D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A27/A27M, Grade 60-30.

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A572/A572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B or Grade C.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A675/A675M, Grade 65.


034100 - 4

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A496/A496M or ASTM A706/A706M.

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563; and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F844.

K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M,Grade A325 Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

L. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

M. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.

N. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 according to SSPC-PA 1.

2.6 BEARING PADS

A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C144 or ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C881/C881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.


034100 - 5

2.8 INSULATED FLAT-WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES

A. Wythe Connectors: Fabricator’s standard manufactured to connect wythes of precast concrete panels.


A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

2. Limit use of fly ash to 20 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and ground granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

E. Water Absorption: Limit water absorption to 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C642, except for boiling requirement.

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.

G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.


034100 - 6

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and specified in-place loads.

G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.

H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.

K. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

N. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval.

2.11 CASTING INSULATED WALL PANELS

A. Cast, screed, and consolidate wythe supported by mold.


034100 - 7

B. Place insulation boards abutting edges and ends of adjacent boards. Insert wythe connectors through insulation, and consolidate concrete around connectors according to connector manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cast, screed, and consolidate top wythe to meet required finish.

2.12 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

2.13 COMMERCIAL FINISHES

A. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in.. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch.

B. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or defects are not permitted.

C. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 to precast concrete units that receive concrete topping after installation.

2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements and ASTM C1610/C1610M, ASTM C1611/C1611M, ASTM C1621/C1621M, and ASTM C1712/C1712M.

B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.


034100 - 8

B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, shoring, and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are complete.

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

2. Remove projecting lifting devices and use plastic patch caps or sand-cement grout to fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

3. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs.

C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of Architect.

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units.

F. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

H. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.

B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E165 or to ASTM E709 and ASTM E1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.

B. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.


034100 - 9

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.

1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and appearance of units have not been impaired.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet.

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



034500 - 1

SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Architectural precast concrete wall panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect.



B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish. 4. Indicate details at building corners.

D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.


034500 - 2

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units at time of bidding.

B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." Provide certification and documentation upon request.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of two sample panels approximately 16 sq. ft. in area for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, to design architectural precast concrete units.

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.


034500 - 3


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C33/C33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: To match existing.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.

C. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.

D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A27/A27M, Grade 60-30.

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A572/A572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B or Grade C.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A675/A675M, Grade 65.


034500 - 4

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A496/A496M or ASTM A706/A706M.

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A307, Grade A or ASTM F1554, Grade 36; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563; and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F844.

K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M,Grade A325 Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

L. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 according to SSPC-PA 1.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C144 or ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C881/C881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.


A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

B. Limit use of fly ash and ground granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

C. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

D. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C1218/C1218M.

E. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum.


034500 - 5

F. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C642, except for boiling requirement.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and specified in-place loads.

F. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.

G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.


034500 - 6

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if used.

K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.

2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match existing panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed.

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch.


034500 - 7

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

F. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.


A. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E165 or to ASTM E709 and ASTM E1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet.

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.


034500 - 8

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Steel reinforcing bars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.

C. Samples: For each type and color of the following:

1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


042200 - 2


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Eucon Blocktite. c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Dry-Block Block Admixture.

C. CMUs: ASTM C90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.

D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2500 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Pattern and Texture:

a. Standard pattern, split-face finish.


042200 - 3

4. Integral Water Repellant: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellant admixture that does not reduce flexural strength. Units made with integral water-repellant, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellant manufacturer’s mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.

2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type M or S.

B. Grout: ASTM C476.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

I. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.


042200 - 4

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet. 7. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods

and cross rods spaced not more than 16” O.C., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/A82M, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.

C. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A153/A153M.

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Copper: ASTM B370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or

0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

3. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.


042200 - 5

4. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

5. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from copper to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.

2. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D4637/D4637M, 0.040 inch thick.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.9 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Loose-Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation).

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.


042200 - 6

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.

3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Decorative CMUs.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C143/C143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.


042200 - 7

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.


042200 - 8

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Pour loose-fill insulation into cavities to fill void spaces at walls indicated. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of fill at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to one story high, but not more than 20 feet.

3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.


042200 - 9

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.8 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.


042200 - 10

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Provisions of Division 1 requirements applicable to this section. 2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear stud connectors through

deck.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

B. Delegated Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated on Drawings to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


051200 - 2

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303, “Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel for Buildings”. 2. AISC 360, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 3. AISC, “Structural Steel Detailing Manual”. 4. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50.

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, : ASTM A36.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M, Grade 50.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS

A. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A325N (Bearing Type) or ASTM A325F (Friction Type).

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 or A36.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Steel Primer: 1. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.4 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.


051200 - 3

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Galvanized surfaces. 4. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2.

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.


051200 - 4

3. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.



052100 - 1

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists. 2. Steel joist accessories.

B. Related Sections Include: 1. Provisions of Division 1 requirements applicable to this Section.


A. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Manufacturer certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents 1. SJI, “Standard Specification for Open Web, Longspan Steel Joists and Joist Girders”. 2. SJI, “Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders”.


052100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL JOISTS

A. K-Series Steel Joist: Manufactured steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

2.2 PRIMERS

A. Primer:

1. SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

2.3 STEEL JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.4 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories.

B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.


052100 - 3

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.



053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck.


A. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Qualifications:

1. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with SDI QA/QC and the following welding code:

a. AWS D1.3/D1.3M.

2. Comply with applicable specifications and documents as follows: a. AISC – “Specifications for the Design of Light-Gauge Cold Formed Steel

Structural Members”. b. AISC – “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel

for Buildings”. c. AWS D1.3 – “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Metal”. d. SDI – “Code of Standard Practice”.


A. Store products in accordance with SDI MOC3. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.


053100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck in accordance with AISI S100.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with SDI RD and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 20 Gauge.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with SDI C, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc

coating. 2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 20 Gauge.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.


053100 - 3

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI standards for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M

I. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install deck panels and accessories in accordance with SDI C, SDI NC, and SDI RD, as applicable; manufacturer's written instructions; and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

3.2 REPAIR

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: 1. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on

deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.



054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Cold-formed steel framing materials. 2. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

2.2 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.


054000 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness

indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


054000 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.



055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Metal ladders. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim. 4. Metal bollards. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.


055000 - 2

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

G. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

H. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.


055000 - 3

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

2.6 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter, steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.

2.7 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe 1/4-inch wall-thickness round steel tubing.

B. Prime steel bollards with zinc-rich primer.


055000 - 4

2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated.

B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.


055000 - 5

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.



055113 - 1

SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings and guards attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.


A. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted

handrails.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs railings, and guards, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design stairs, railings, and guards including attachment to building construction.


055113 - 2

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing and guard loads in

addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.2 METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Tubing for Railings and Guards: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed) or ASTM A513/A513M.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Guards to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and guards to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for interior use; noncorrosive and


055113 - 3

nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,railings, and guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, columns and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Assemble stairs, railings, and guards in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.

1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated.

2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible.

1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.


055113 - 4

a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers. c. Finish: Shop primed.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as [required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel framing. b. Finish: Shop primed.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch.

1. Fabricate treads and landing subplatforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.

2. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 4. Shape metal pans to include abrasive nosing integral with riser. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS

A. Fabricate railings and guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch-diameter top and bottom rails. 2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-1/2-inch-diameter intermediate rails spaced less than 21

inches clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings and guards with welded connections.

1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose.

2. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 3. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 4. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 5. Remove flux immediately. 6. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2

- Completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes are okay as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings and guards as follows:


055113 - 5

1. As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction.

1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.

a. Clean bottom surface of plates. b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. c. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate

before packing with grout. e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids

remain.

1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. 2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-

resistant grouts.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


055113 - 6

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS

A. Adjust railing and guard systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints.

1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and variations

from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 4. Secure posts, rail ends, and guard ends to building construction as follows:

a. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members. b. Anchor handrail and guards ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges

welded to rail and guard ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.

1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.

3.3 REPAIR

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.



055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel railings.


A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.


055213 - 2

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL RAILINGS

A. Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed) or ASTM A513/A513M, Type 5.

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Cast Iron Fittings: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railing Components: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.

1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated.

2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.


055213 - 3

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended to so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contour of adjoining surfaces.

D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated cap and end fittings of same metal and finish as railings.

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work.

1. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 2. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

K. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height.

1. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 2. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, hot-dip galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.


055213 - 4

B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1 for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

C. Shop-Painted Finish:

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings.

1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Install railings level, plumb, square, true to line; without distortion, warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established

lines and levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Install removable railing sections, where indicated on Drawing, in slip-fit sockets.

B. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.


061053 - 2

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.


061053 - 3

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. DuPont de Nemours, Inc. c. Owens Corning.

2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12

inches and wider in width.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

3. Polyurethane Pour-In-Place Insulation: Closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84, specifically formulated for pour-in-place applications.


072100 - 2

B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.



072600 - 1

SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, 10-mil-thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS AT CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE

A. Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to equipment.

B. Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic, airtight membrane at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations.



074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal liner panels.



B. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.


A. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


074213.13 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LINER PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal liner panels designed for interior walls and field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Metal Liner Panels Solid panels formed with intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with a flush joint between panels.


a. Bridger Steel. b. Fabral. c. MBCI.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. 4. Seam Height: 1.5 inches.


A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete panel system including trim, fasciae, corner units, clips, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Trim: Provide trim formed from same material as metal panels to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, and fillers. Finish trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

C. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements


074213.13 - 3

demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat.

2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 074213.13


075323 - 1

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) roofing system. 2. Loosely laid and ballasted, ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) roofing

system. 3. Roof insulation.



B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following:

1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane and

fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system. 5. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.


A. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

B. Product Test Reports: For components of roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.

C. Sample warranties.


075323 - 2



B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the Resistance to Foot Traffic Test in FM Approvals 4470.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-TERPOLYMER (EPDM) ROOFING

A. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced EPDM sheet.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products.


075323 - 3

c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Versico Roofing Systems.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Color: Black

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components.

1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing.

F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. Insulfoam; Carlisle Construction Materials Company. d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Thickness:


075323 - 4

a. Base Layer: 2.30-inches. b. Upper Layer: 2.30-inches. c. Total R-Value of insulation shall be a minimum of R=26.0.

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows: 1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.

2.6 BALLAST

A. Aggregate Ballast: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone that withstands weather exposure without significant deterioration and does not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following size: 1. Size: ASTM D448, Size 3, ranging in size from 1 to 2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.


075323 - 5

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Installation Over Metal Decking:

1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows and with long joints continuous at right angle to flutes of decking.

a. Locate end joints over crests of decking. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.

d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. f. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate. g. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners

specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to metal decks. 1) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and

field of roof.

2. Install upper layers of insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.

a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12

inches in adjacent rows. c. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. e. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Loosely lay each layer of insulation units over substrate.

3.4 LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Loosely lay roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Comply with requirements in ASNI/SPRI RP-4 for System 2.

D. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

E. Accurately align roof membrane, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.


075323 - 6

F. Mechanically fasten or adhere roof membrane at corners, perimeters, and transitions according to requirements in ASNI/SPRI RP-4.

G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.

H. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement.

1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation.

2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations. 3. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by roofing

system manufacturer.

I. Leave seams uncovered until inspected by roofing system manufacturer.

J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.

K. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over roof membrane at the rate required by roofing system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to roofing system. Lay ballast as roof membrane is installed, leaving roof membrane ballasted at end of workday.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.


075323 - 7

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.



076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing. 2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

B. See Section 042300 for masonry flashing and trim.



B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled Work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets,

flashings, and counterflashings. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long by actual width.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


076200 - 2

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual” and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: Match existing.


076200 - 3

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.


A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.

C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

H. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-


076200 - 4

mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.


A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements

for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil-canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.


076200 - 5

2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts to dimensions indicated on Drawings, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors.

B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflows. Match existing color and material.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Match Existing.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch] <Insert dimension> thick.

C. Counterflashing: [Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. ]Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water.


076200 - 6

2. Lap joints not less than 2 inches.


A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 3. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. 4. Space individual cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two

fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 5. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil-canning, and free of

buckling and tool marks. 6. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

2. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

3. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter.

1. Pretin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pretinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work.


076200 - 7

2. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. 4. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint.

a. Fill joint completely. b. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A. Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system in accordance with cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Downspouts:

1. Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 2. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. 3. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 4. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.

C. Parapet Scuppers:

1. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

2. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and solder or seal with elastomeric sealant to scupper.

3. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head. 4. Solder or seal with elastomeric sealant exterior wall scupper flanges into back of

conductor head.

D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch below scupper discharge.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF FLASHINGS

A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard.

1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. 2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather

resistant.

B. Copings:

1. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.


076200 - 8

1. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. 2. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. 3. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Architect.



077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatches.

B. Related Work Includes: 1. Roof equipment curbs and supports indicated on “M” drawings and in corresponding

divisions of Project Manual.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof hatch.


A. Sample warranties.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


077200 - 2


a. Architectural Specialties, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. BILCO Company (The). d. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

2. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. 3. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 30-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.

a. When release is actuated, lid shall open against 10-lbf/sq. ft. snow or wind load and lock in position.

4. Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated. b. Finish: Mill phosphatized.

5. Construction:

a. Insulation: 1-inch-thick, glass-fiber board.

1) R-Value: 4.3 according to ASTM C1363.

b. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter. c. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard

metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. d. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal

curb. e. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless

otherwise indicated. f. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with

perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

6. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant; with hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and outside operation of lids.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation and mill phosphatized for field painting where indicated.

1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A755/A755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.


077200 - 3

3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.


A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

D. Underlayment:

1. Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D4397. 3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 4. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of

slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

E. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


077200 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum stainless steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet.

C. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive materials.


A. Product certificates.

B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fire protection, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.


078100 - 2

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material per UL Design No. D878: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application. 1. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based on field

testing according to ASTM E736. 2. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E937. 3. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E759. 4. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to

ASTM E760. 5. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to

ASTM E859.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with sprayed fire-resistive material and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer for the required fire-resistance design.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire protection materials during application.

B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fire protection.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fire protection assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fire protection Work.


078100 - 3

B. Comply with sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fire protection; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Spray apply fire protection to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer.

D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after sprayed fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair fire protection damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

B. Repair fire protection by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.



079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


079200 - 2

2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C1248.

B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.


079200 - 3

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform one test for each 500 feet of joint length.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.


079200 - 4

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry. c. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete planks. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.


079200 - 5

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.



B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Republic Doors and Frames. 4. Security Metal Products; a brand of ASSA ABLOY.


081113 - 2

5. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings.

2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 1; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level C.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard. f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer’s standard core for fire-rated doors.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. b. Construction: Knocked down at existing and concrete openings. Welded at other

locations.

2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. [At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule] <Insert locations>.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with

minimum A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges.


081113 - 3

f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.

g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.

h. Core: Polyisocyanurate.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating.

b. Construction: Welded.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

C. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.


081113 - 4

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.


081113 - 5

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3.3 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service doors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, door-opening framing, corner guards, and bollards.


A. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Sample warranty.


A. Special warranty.

B. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


083323 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.


a. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. b. Overhead Door Corporation. c. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000.

C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2” – 3” nominal center-to-center height.

E. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Medium duty, up to 12 cycles per hour and up to 50 cycles per day. 2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior. 4. Motor Electrical Characteristics:

a. Horsepower: 1/2.

5. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor. 7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted.

I. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with pull-down strap.


083323 - 3

J. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.5 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or flame.

2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.

2.6 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.


083323 - 4

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

C. Pull-Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches high.

2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly.

1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.


083323 - 5

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained or constant pressure on close button.

E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.

G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.



083323.13 - 1

SECTION 083323.13 – OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. High Performance High Speed Roll-Up Rubber Doors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. UL Listed - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Product Listed.

1.3 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, guides, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of door materials, construction and fabrication. 4. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. Include

automatic closing devices and testing and resetting instructions 5. Installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring

methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer’s maintenance instructions Including a detailed

parts lists and maintenance recommendations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE


083323.13 - 2

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of 3 years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work

of this section with minimum 2 years and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete

and dry.

C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid

damage to installed materials. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door warranty and operator system, except the finish, to

be free of defects in material and workmanship for 5 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Overhead Door Corporation. 2. TNR Industrial Doors 3. PerforMax Global

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

013000.


083323.13 - 3

2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE EXTERIOR HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP RUBBER DOORS

A. Model: RapidFlex Model 995 extreme exterior high speed roll-up rubber door by Overhead Door Corporation or equivalent. 1. Performance:

a. Operation Cycles: Drive motor and gearbox capable of operating for not less than 1,000,000 cycles. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

B. Materials and Components:

1. Door Curtain Design: a. Door Curtain: High strength curtain, as follows.

1) 5 layers of Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR) with 4 ply of polyester weave.

b. Vision Section: Minimum 2 mm thick clear PVC, full width 10 inch height by 18 inches (254 mm by 457 mm) vision panel.

c. Curtain Retainers: Curtain retained by polyethylene continuous wind locks at both edges of the panel to remain engage inside the guides under static and dynamic pressures.

2. Bottom Bar: Fully padded, break away bottom bar full width of the opening, sufficient to maintain bottom edge of curtain parallel to the door threshold. a. Finish: Powder coated safety yellow. b. Upon impact, bottom bar releases from Guides and door operation is stopped.

Controller must indicate problem encountered and instruct operator on steps to fix the problem. Detection must be achieved via a solid state device for accuracy, no external electromechanical switch is allowed. 1) Door must automatically reset itself after impact by pressing a button on

control panel. 2) Provide door with wireless failsafe electric safety edge. 3) Break away detection sensitivity must be field adjustable

3. Guides: Construct of high strength steel with members fully bolted together. a. Extend assembly a maximum of 8.5 inches (215.9 mm) from the wall. b. Extend assembly width a maximum of 6.56 inches (166.62 mm) outward to the

side from clear daylight opening. c. Guides have a minimum wall thickness of 0.375 inches (9.53 mm) to minimize

damage if impacted. d. Finish: Powder coated safety yellow e. Door shall have no visible air gaps along the side or top of the door when door

panel is in the closed or down position. 4. Door Header: Top roll assembly fabricated of high strength steel barrel supported

with powder coated high strength steel brackets at each end with self-aligning bearings. a. Drum Barrel System: Minimum 8.625 inches (219 mm) diameter ASTM A

500 Grade B high strength steel pipe. b. Idler: Fabric guiding barrel, minimum 4.875 inch (123.83 mm) diameter ASTM

A 500 Grade B high strength steel pipe.


083323.13 - 4

c. Brackets: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick ASTM A 36 hot rolled steel with heavy-duty, self-aligning bearings with cast iron housings.

d. Springless System: No balancing springs or counterweights permitted. e. Head frame provided with a single brush seal along the top of the door.

5. Hood: Top roll assembly enclosed with an external metal hood. a. Finish: Galvanized steel hood with black polyester top coat. b. Material: 22 gauge steel with intermediate supports as required.

6. Electric Door Operator: UL listed. a. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, rated up to 60 cycles per hour under

constant load. b. Motor Exposure: Exterior and Interior use. c. Direct Side Mounted: Operator mounted directly to door drive shaft to the left

or right side of the door. No chain and sprocket allowed. d. Operator: Minimum 1.0 horsepower. Motor and gearbox designed for high

cycle operation with built-in gearbox failure door stop safety device e. Hand Chain: Manual brake disengagement pull switch and hand chain which

allows door to be manually opened and closed during a power outage and installation.

f. Limit System: Magnetic type providing absolute positioning with push to set and remote setting capabilities. Limit system shall remain synchronized with the door during manual operation and supply power interruptions.

g. Timer to Close: Each door to have automatic closing controlled by an adjustable hold open time delay.

7. Control System: a. Microprocessor based with variable frequency drive controller, capable of

variable speed control in both up and down directions. System incorporates a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to display the system status.

b. Capable of monitoring and reporting on a variety of operating conditions, including: Current operating status, Current command status, Current error status (if applicable), Hoist interlock status (if applicable), Service reminder status, and 24VDC status.

c. Control system is housed in a NEMA 4X panel with built-in push buttons and main power padlock-able rotary disconnect switch.

8. Activation Devices: Provide for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate activation and safety devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms. a. Pedestrian Type Activation Devices:

1) Three Push Button Switch: Button for open, button for close, button for stop.

9. Safety Devices: Provide for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate safety devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms. a. Door provided with two sets of Through Beam Photo Eyes located in plane or

as close as possible to travelling path of the door curtain. 10. Finish Requirements:


083323.13 - 5

a. Galvanized Steel: Hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on black polyester top coat.

b. PowderGuard powder coat: Guides, bottom bar, and brackets shall be powder coated with weather and corrosion resistant polyester powder coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

B. Verify site electrical characteristics and supplies.

C. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to

be performed.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.

C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only.

D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Division 26. Complete wiring from

disconnect to unit components.

F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 079200.

G. Install perimeter trim and closures.

H. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.


083323.13 - 6

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without

binding or distortion.

B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Remove labels and visible markings.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain high speed roll-up doors. 3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.



087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.



B. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified.

C. Door hardware schedule.

D. Keying schedule, coordinated with Owner’s representative.


A. Sample warranty.




A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.


087100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

B. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC A117.1.

2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. 1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3.

2.3 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.


a. Hager Companies. b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Description: Function as indicated on Hardware Section Article 3.

2. Levers: Wrought brass a. AL Series, Saturn.

3. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought bronze.


087100 - 3

4. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 2; Series 4000.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match existing facility standard by Medeco Security Locks; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset.

1. Core Type: Removable.

2.6 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock..

1. Existing System:

a. Owner's existing system and nomenclature, “A” key.

B. Keys: Brass.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

2.7 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release.


087100 - 4

2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Hager Companies. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.


a. Hager Companies. b. Hiawatha, Inc; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.10 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. Hager Companies. b. Pemko; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Zero International; an Allegion brand.

B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows:

2.11 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. Pemko; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.


087100 - 5

c. Zero International; an Allegion brand.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18. 1. Finish: 626, Satin Chromium

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

F. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


087100 - 6


3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Hardware Set 1 (Doors 100B, 100C): 1. Hardware and accessories per Sections 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS and

083323.13 OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS.

B. Hardware Set 2 (Door 101): 1. (1-1/2) Pair Butt Hinge 2. (1) Passage Latchset 3. (1) Stop

C. Hardware Set 3 (Door 102): 1. (3) Pair Butt Hinge 2. (2) Surface Closers with Stops 3. (1) Coordinator 4. (1) Classroom Lockset on Active Leaf 5. (1) Dummy Handle on Inactive Leaf

D. Hardware Set 4 (Doors 103, 201): 1. 60 Min. Fire-Rated Assembly at Door 103 2. (1-1/2) Pair Butt Hinge 3. (1) Surface Closer with Stop 4. (1) Passage Latchset 5. (1) Stop

E. Hardware Set 5 (Door 105): 1. (1-1/2) Pair Butt Hinge 2. (1) Surface Closer 3. (1) Entry Lockset 4. (1) Threshold 5. (1) Set Weatherstripping

F. Hardware Set 6 (Door 107): 1. (1-1/2) Pair Butt Hinge 2. (1) Surface Closer 3. (1) Classroom Lockset

G. Hardware Set 7 (Doors 202, 203) 1. (3) Pair Butt Hinge 2. (2) Surface Closers with Stops 3. (1) Coordinator 4. (1) Passage Latchset on Active Leaf 5. (1) Dummy Handle on Inactive Leaf


099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Primers. 2. Finish coatings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 5. Valspar Corporation (The).

2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Surface-Tolerant Metal Primer: Corrosion-resistant, solvent-based metal primer formulated for use on structural steel and metal fabrications that have been minimally prepared.


099113 - 2


a. Benjamin Moore & Co. b. Diamond Vogel Paints. c. PPG Paints. d. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.4 FINISH COATINGS

A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Enamel, Gloss: Solvent-based, alkyd or modified-alkyd enamel formulated for quick-drying capabilities and for use on exterior, primed, metal and dimensionally stable wood surfaces.


a. Benjamin Moore & Co. b. Diamond Vogel Paints. c. PPG Paints. d. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2. Gloss Level: Gloss of 70-85 units at 60 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with finishes and primers.

B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.


099113 - 3

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems specified in this Section.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply paints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Surface-tolerant metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel, gloss.



099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Primers. 2. Water-based finish coatings. 3. Solvent-based finish coatings. 4. Floor sealers and paints. 5. Dry fall coatings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Diamond Vogel Paints. 4. Pratt & Lambert. 5. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


099123 - 2

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Interior, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Primer Sealer: Water-based primer sealer with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter for use on new interior plaster, concrete, and gypsum wallboard surfaces that are subsequently to be painted with latex finish coats.


a. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. b. Benjamin Moore & Co. c. PPG Paints. d. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Surface-Tolerant Metal Primer: Corrosion-resistant, solvent-based metal primer formulated for use on structural steel and metal fabrications that have been minimally prepared.


a. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. b. Benjamin Moore & Co. c. Diamond Vogel Paints. d. PPG Paints. e. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

C. Cementitious Galvanized Primer: Solvent-based primer composed of linseed oil/alkyd resin and portland cement for cleaned galvanized metal prior to finish coating.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. PPG Paints.

D. Water-Based Galvanized-Metal Primer: Corrosion-resistant, acrylic primer; formulated for use on cleaned/etched, exterior, galvanized metal to prepare it for subsequent water-based coatings.


a. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. b. Benjamin Moore & Co. c. PPG Paints. d. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).


099123 - 3

2.4 WATER-BASED FINISH COATS

A. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Satin: White or colored latex paint with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use.


a. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. b. Benjamin Moore & Co. c. PPG Paints. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2. Gloss and Sheen Level: Gloss of 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and minimum sheen of 35 units at 85 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.

2.5 SOLVENT-BASED FINISH COATS

A. Interior, Alkyd, Semigloss: Pigmented, solvent-based alkyd paint for use on primed/sealed interior plaster, gypsum, wood, and metal walls primarily in residential and moderate traffic commercial environments.



2. Gloss Level: Gloss of 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.

B. Interior, Alkyd, Gloss: Pigmented, solvent-based alkyd paint for use on primed/sealed interior plaster, gypsum, wood, and metal walls primarily in residential and moderate traffic commercial environments.



2. Gloss Level: Gloss of 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.


099123 - 4

2.6 FLOOR SEALERS AND PAINTS

A. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer: Clear, water-based, acrylic-copolymer-emulsion sealer formulated for oil, gasoline, alkali, and water resistance and for use on concrete traffic surfaces.


a. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. b. H&C® Decorative Concrete Products; a brand of Sherwin-Williams Co. c. PPG Paints. d. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

C. Painting Fire-Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping.


099123 - 5

d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Alkyd over Cementitious Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, alkyd, semigloss.



104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.




A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.


104416 - 2


a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries. b. Badger Fire Protection. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company. f. Nystrom. g. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.


a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries. b. Badger Fire Protection. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company. f. Nystrom. g. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.


104416 - 3

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches above finished floor.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



105113 - 1

SECTION 105113 – METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. 18-inch Wide Single-Tier Standard Metal Lockers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines.

B. IBC - International Building Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.

B. Product Data - Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of lockers and in-terface with other products.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a Quality System in place to en-sure and be able to substantiate that manufactured units conform to requirements and match the approved design.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Locker components shall be stored flat, if shipped unassembled, until assembly. All fin-ishes shall be protected from soiling and damage during handling.

C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based ma-terials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


105113 - 2

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of locker products that fail in materials or workmanship within 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by Salsbury Industries, 18300 Central Avenue, Carson, CA 90746-4008

1. Provide basis of design products or comparable products of one of the following aproved manufacturers:

a. Jorgenson Industrial Companies

b. Lockers Manufacturing, Inc.

c. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Instructions to Bidders and Di vision 01 General Requirements.

2.2 LOCKERS

Single-tier 18-inch wide standard metal lockers: Constructed of 16 gauge steel; durable pow-der coated finish; includes a lift up handle and recessed hasp for added security; can accommo-date built-in combination locks, built-in key locks, combination padlocks, key padlocks or fac-tory installed resettable combination locks. A. 18-inch Wide Standard Metal Locker Series: 1. 18-51000 series: Single-tier. B. Unit Width: 18 inches (457 mm). C. Unit Height:

1. 72 inches (1,828 mm) without legs.

D. Unit Depth: 2. 21 inches (533 mm).

F. Unit Color: 1. Color: Gray - standard.


105113 - 3

2.3 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

B. Standard Hardware Features: 1. Padlock hasp. 2. One top-mounted, two-pronged stainless steel coat hook. 3. Three wall-mounted, single-prong stainless steel coat hooks. 4. Horizontal venting. 5. Five knuckle door hinges. 6. Adjustable hat shelf 7. Coat rod

2.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

A. Sloping hoods.

B. Base panels – 6 inches (152 mm) high: 1. Front base.

C. Fillers: 1. As required to close gap to adjacent wall. H. Additional compartment shelf.

I. Engraved name/number plates. J. Locker unit legs shall be supplied, unless otherwise specified, at 6 inches (152 mm) high

in same color as locker unit. Locker bases shall be fabricated from 0.0625 inch (1.59 mm) thick steel sheet.

2.5 CONSTRUCTION

A. Locker Doors: Steel specially formed for added strength and rigidity and to ensure tight joints at fastening points.

1. Door: a. 16 gauge - .060 inch (1.52 mm) thick steel. b. Holes provided for attaching number plates. 2. Ventilation: Vents provided on each door in standard louver pattern. a. Single-tier lockers – 6 feet high units:Four 5-3/4 inch (146 mm) louvers top and

bottom. 3. Multi-Point Latch: Full channel formation of adequate depth to fully conceal lock bar on lock side, channel formation on hinge side, right angle formations across top and bottom.

B. Locker Body: Solid steel specially formed for added strength and rigidity and to ensure tight joints at fastening points.

C. Hinges: Hinge: 0.074 inch (1.88 mm) thick sheet steel, double spun, full loop, tight pin,


105113 - 4

projection welded to door frame and securely fastened to the door. 1. Single-tier lockers: Three 2 inch (51 mm) high five-knuckle hinges. 2. Double-tier & triple-tier lockers: Two 2 inch (51 mm) high five-knuckle hinges.

D. Optional factory assembly of locker bodies using heavy duty steel rivets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of un-satisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Anchor the units to the wall studs through the locker back and to the floor.

C. Lockers can be either floor-mounted or installed on concrete or wood bases as scheduled or indicated. Floor or base shall be level for proper installation.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


211000 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 10 00 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and general requirements of Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Extent of fire protection systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by re-

quirements of this section.

C. Applications of fire protection systems include the following.

1. Fire protection distribution piping from existing risers to sprinkler heads. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Code - Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems".

B. Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.

C. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data for fire protection systems, materials and products.

B. Submit copy of hydraulic calculations used for sizing sprinkler piping.

C. Submit scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not neces-sarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between pip-ing and proximate equipment.

D. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work

has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 14, and also that system is operational, com-plete, and has no defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of mate-rials which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than 1 type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.


211000 - 2

2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. Label all valves with plastic or brass valve tags identifying use of each valve. 2.03 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with the following listing:

1. Black Steel Pipe:

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 up to 2" and smaller b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded.

2. Black Steel Pipe:

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 2½ “ and above b. Fittings: mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings.

2.04 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons:

1. Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated.

2.05 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS

A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying in accordance with the following listing:

1. Clevis hanger or band hangers for horizontal-piping. 2. Screw in anchors and clamps for building attachments.

2.06 BASIC VALVES

A. Provide valves in accordance with the following listing:

1. Interior Valves -

a. Sectional: ball valves or butterfly valves. b. Check: Swing check valves.

2.07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

A. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Pro-vide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

1. Provide vane type water flow detectors with two contacts.

2. Provide sprinklers of type indicated on Drawings.


211000 - 3

a. Finish - Chrome plate for occupied areas, cast brass for unoccupied areas.

b. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench - Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with capacity to store 4 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties

of one of the following:

1. Globe 2. Tyco 3. Viking 4. Reliable

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Install pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 requirements.

3.03 FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEMS:

A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping materi-als. Install fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Ensure that fire sprinkler system complies with requirements.

B. Install Inspector's test connection.

C. Install drain piping at low points of fire sprinkler piping.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceil-ings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Install building attachments at required locations for proper piping support. Space attach-ments within maximum piping span length in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 requirements.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Install valves in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 requirements.


211000 - 4

3.07 INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

A. Install fire protection specialties as indicated, and in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 and 14. 3.08 FLUSHING

A. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in ser-vice, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinkler.


A. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.

B. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with

ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate com-pliance.

C. Test to be witnessed by Owner's representative.

3.10 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide 4 extra sprinkler heads for each style and temperature range required.

END SECTION


220700 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of contract including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this Section.

B. Extent of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Domestic Water Piping Systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installation shall meet the requirements of Wisconsin Administrative Code SPS 364 and SPS 382.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the fol-

lowing: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Certainteed Corp. 3. Knauf Fiberglass 4. Manville Corp. 5. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 6. Pittsburg Corning Corp. 7. Rubatex Corp.

C. Flame/Smoke Ratings - Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, cover-

ings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of

mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or level, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install

damaged insulation; remove from project site.


220700 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - ASTM C 547 Class 1, K value 0.23 at 75F. Owens-Corning Fiberglass 25 ASJ.

B. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement - As recommended by insulation manufacturer for appli-

cations indicated.

C. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes - As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted - Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture runouts from faces of wall or floor to fixture

B. Cold Piping:

1. Application Requirements - Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:

a. Domestic cold water piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thick-nesses of insulation: a. Insulation: Fiberglass; 3/4" thickness.

C. Hot Piping:

1. Application Requirements - Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:

a. Domestic hot water piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thick-ness of insulation: a. Insulation: Fiberglass; 3/4" thick.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to en-

sure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.


220700 - 3

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture

or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping pene-

trations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation.

3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with va-por barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during

remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END SECTION


221000 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 10 00 Facility Water Distribution PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and general requirements of contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 specifications sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Extent of Facility Water Distribution systems work, is indicated on drawings and schedules,

and by requirements of this section.

C. Applications for domestic water piping systems include the following:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping.


A. Comply with applicable portions of the Wisconsin Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data for domestic water piping systems, materials and products.

B. Submit laboratory tests on water from domestic water system showing no bacteriological contamination remains in the piping system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure rat-ings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching pip-ing and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in domestic water piping systems.

2.02 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS


B. Domestic Water Piping, Above Grade:

1. Copper tube. a. Wall Thickness: Type M, hard-drawn temper. b. Fittings: Wrought-copper, solder-joints.


221000 - 2

C. Below Grade Water Piping: 1. 2 and ½” and smaller: Type L soft copper 2. 1” and smaller: Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tube with oxygen barrier 3. Fittings: Brass or Stainless steel compression fittings

2.03 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons:

1. Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Provide standard products which effectively isolates ferrous from non-ferrous piping

(electrical conductance), prevents galvanic action, stops corrosion. 2.04 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying in accordance with the following listing:


2.05 BASIC VALVES

A. Provide Class 125 ball valves, bronze 2 piece body, bronze ball, bronze stem for shut off valves.

2.06 SPECIAL VALVES

A. Hose Bibb - Bronze body, Chrome Finish, renewable composition disc, tee handle, anti-siphon vacuum breaker, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydrants of one of the

following:

1. Josam Mfg. Co. 2. Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. 3. Woodford 4. Zurn Industries Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Carefully inspect all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories before installation. Any items that are unsuitable, cracked or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the job site immediately. Excluding minor surface rust, piping that exhibits significant oxida-tion or corrosion will be rejected.


221000 - 3

B. Exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, laying and erecting to prevent entry of for-eign matter into piping, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories. Do not erect or install any item that is not clean.

C. Remove all lose dirt, scale, oil, chips, burrs and other foreign material from the internal and

external surfaces of all pipe and piping components prior to assembly, including debris asso-ciated with cutting, threading and welding.

D. Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making threaded joints; no hard set-

ting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed.

E. During construction, until system is fully operational, keep all openings in piping and equip-ment closed except when actual work is being performed on that item of the system. Use plugs, caps, blind flanges or other items designed for this purpose.

F. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct

any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping.

G. Run water mains level. H. Use eccentric fittings for changes in horizontal pipe sizes with the fittings installed for proper

air venting. Concentric fittings may be used for changes in vertical pipe sizes.

I. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

J. Install Shutoff Valves at each fixture and elsewhere as indicated.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install building attachments at required locations for proper piping support. Space attach-ments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze

type hangers where possible.

C. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and

other accessories.

E. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

F. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are

copper plated, or plastic coated. The use of duct tape or electricians tape is not acceptable.


221000 - 4

G. Install coated protective shields where low-compressive-strength insulation is covering piping H. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceil-ings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Install at each piping joint between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Comply with manufactur-

er's installation instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable.

B. Do not install bronze valves and valve components in direct contact with steel, unless bronze

and steel are separated by dielectric insulator. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection.

END SECTION


221300 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and general requirements of contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Extent of Facility Sanitary Sewerage system work is indicated on drawings and schedules and

by requirements of this section.

C. Applications for soil and waste piping systems include the following:

1. Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings including soil stacks, vent stacks, horizontal branches, traps, and connections to fixtures and drains.

2. Underground building drain piping including mains, branches, traps, connections to fix-

tures and drains, and connections to stacks. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with applicable portions of the Wisconsin Plumbing Code SPS 382.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data for soil and waste piping systems materials and products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure rat-ings, and capacities as indicated. Where more than 1 type of materials or products are indi-cated, selection is Installer's option.


A. Above Ground Piping Within Buildings:

1. Pipe Size 8" and Smaller - Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe (PVC).

a. Pipe Weight: Type DWV. b. Fittings: PVC plastic, type DWV, socket-type, solvent cement joints.

B. Underground Building Drain Piping:

1. Pipe Size 10" and Smaller - Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe (PVC).


221300 - 2

a. Pipe Weight: Standard. b. Fittings: PVC sewer pipe fittings, solvent cement joints.

2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Provide supports in accordance with the following listing:

1. Steel clevises for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two-bolt riser clamps, for vertical-piping clamps. 3. C-clamps, beam clamps, and steel brackets for building attachment. 4. Protection saddles, for saddles and shields.

2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS

A. Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated.

B. Cleanout Plugs - Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, raised head.

C. Floor Cleanouts - Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; Nickel-Bronze adjustable round top. as follows:

D. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage piping products of

one of the following:

1. Josam Mfg. Co. 2. Smith (Jay R.) Co. 3. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe 4. Zurn Industries

2.05 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-iron body and flashing collar with closure plug, nickel bronze adjustable strainer head and secured square hole grate.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor drains of one of the following:

1. Josam Mfg. Co. 2. Smith (Jay R.) Co. 3. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe 4. Zurn Industries

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SOIL AND WASTE ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Install soil and waste piping in accordance with the Wisconsin Plumbing Code. B. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct

any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult


221300 - 3

drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping.

C. Install building drain and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%)

for piping 2" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping larger than 2”. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN PIPING

A. Install underground building drains as indicated and in accordance with Wisconsin Plumbing Code.

B. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and align-

ment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream.

C. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of un-completed piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

E. Install building drain and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of ¼"per foot (2%)

for piping 2" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping larger than 2”. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Install building attachments at required locations for proper piping support. Space attach-ments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.

B. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other

piping.

C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS

A. Install cleanouts in sanitary above ground piping and sanitary building drain piping as indi-cated and as required by the Wisconsin Plumbing Code.

3.05 PIPING TESTS

A. Test soil and waste piping system in accordance with requirements of the Wisconsin Plumb-ing Code.

END SECTION


223000 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 30 00 Plumbing Water Equipment PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of plumbing equipment work is indicated on drawings and provisions of this section,

including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section.

C. Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the following:

1. Tankless Electric water heaters 2. Emergency Thermostatic Mixing Valve


A. Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards.

B. Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and

electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment.

C. Provide water heaters with safety relief valves bearing ASME valve markings. D. ASSE 1017 - Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems. E. ASSE 1071 – Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and start-up instruc-tions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated.

B. Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances,

and methods of assembly of all components.

C. Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections.

D. Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing equipment. Include "trou-

ble-shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual.


223000 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS:

A. Provide tankless electric water heaters of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics as indi-cated on schedule or drawings.

B. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE and IECC 2015 for energy efficiency. Provide UL499 listing.

C. Maximum working pressure of 150 psi D. Copper clad immersion heating elements with brass terminations.

E. 0.3 GPM activation flow.

F. External Digital thermostatic control. G. H. Temperature and pressure relief valve.

I. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide tankless electric water

heaters of one of the following:

1. Rheem 2. Rinnai 3. Bosch 4. Bradford White 5. AO Smith

2.02 EMERGENCY THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

A. General: Liquid-filled thermal motor and piston control mechanism with positive shutoff of hot water when cold water supply is lost.

B. Valve allows cold flow in event of loss or interruption of hot water supply or thermostat fail-

ure.

C. Valve controls outlet temperature over wide flow range and is suitable for drench shower and eyewash applications.

1. Inlet Water temperature: Maximum 180 °F (82 °C).

2. Tempered-Water Setting: Factory preset, 85 °F (29 °C).

3. Temperature Range: 65 to 95 °F (18 to 35 °C).

D. Valve includes vandal-resistant temperature adjustment, dial thermometer, integral strainer,

and check stops.

E. Subject to compliance with requirement, provide water conditioners of one of the following:

1. Bradley or equal


223000 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS:

A. Install electric water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation in-structions, and in compliance with applicable codes.

B. Orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level

and plumb unit.

C. Furnish wiring diagram to Electrical Installer. D. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.

E. Start-up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start-up in-

structions. Check and calibrate controls. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

A. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. Ad-

just set point within allowable temperature range.

END SECTION


224000 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of plumbing fixtures and trim work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by re-

quirements of this section.

C. Types of plumbing fixtures required for the project include the following:

1. Emergency Eyewash 2. Utility Tub.


A. Plumbing Fixture Standards - Comply with applicable portions of Wisconsin Plumbing Code pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures.

B. ANSI/ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

C. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's specifications for plumbing fixtures and trim, including catalog cut of each fixture type and trim item furnished, roughing-in dimensioned drawings, and installation instructions.

B. Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each fixture type and trim item, including instruc-

tions for care of finishes. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures individually wrapped in factory-fabricated containers.

B. Handle plumbing fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring the fixture fin-ish. Do not install damaged plumbing fixtures; replace and return damaged units to equip-ment manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Provide factory-fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type fix-ture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by


224000 - 2

their published product information or as scheduled. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manu-facturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Ex-posed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, decoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Synthetic Stone - High quality, free from defects, glaze on exposed surfaces, stain resistant.

2.03 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Water Outlets - At locations where water is supplied provide faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.

B. P-Traps - Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for direct connection to

drainage system.

C. Escutcheons - Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons with friction clips.

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing fixtures and trim of one of the following:

1. Electric Water Coolers:

a. Bradley b. Acorn c. Guardian d. Speakman e. Haws

2. Utility Tubs:

a. Mustee b. American Standard c. Kohler Company

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.


224000 - 3

B. Examine floors and substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accom-plished.

C. Correct any incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation

of plumbing fixtures.

D. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accord-ance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. Comply with applicable requirements of the Wisconsin Plumbing Code pertaining to installa-

tion of plumbing fixtures.

C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement.

3.03 CLEAN AND PROTECT

A. Clean plumbing fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Protect installation fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to origi-

nal at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect or Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units.

END SECTION


230593 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section,

and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Air distribution systems and associated equipment.

C. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for sys-

tems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents.

D. Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section includes the

following as applied to mechanical equipment:

1. RTU, Ductwork, 2. Exhaust Fans 3. Ductwork systems, Diffuser & Grilles 4. Air Compressor Ductwork systems


A. A firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project.

B. Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,

Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, ad-justing and balancing, except as otherwise indicated and NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certified test reports signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work.

B. Reports shall be on NEBB forms unless other forms have been approved by the Engineer pri-

or to the start of testing.

C. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration date with submission of final test report.


230593 - 2

D. Include copies of certified test reports in maintenance manuals.

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no work still to be completed.

B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free

from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.

B. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork

and housings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatis-factory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.

3.02 TEST AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards.

B. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recom-

mended by applicable standards.

C. Air side system balancing shall include but not be limited to the following procedures:

1. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements.

2. Test and record motor full load amperage.

3. Check all fans for correct rotation.

4. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge at all air handling equip-ment.

5. Test and adjust system for design outside air and recirculated air quantities.

6. Adjust and record all main supply and return air ducts and zones to proper design CFM.


230593 - 3

7. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 5% of design requirements.

Record data and location. Use manufacturer's rating and calculations.

8. Adjust all diffusers and grilles to minimize drafts in all areas.

9. Test and record all air temperatures - supply, return, mixed, outside air including dry and wet bulb.

D. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test pur-

poses, in manner recommended by original Installer.

E. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.

F. Balancing contractor to work with temperature control contractor and HVAC contractor to

verify correct operation of entire HVAC system, before submitting report.

END SECTION


230700 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Ductwork System Insulation:

a. Cold Ductwork. b. Dual Temperature Ductwork.


A. Installation shall meet the requirements of Wisconsin Administrative Code SPS 363 and SPS 364.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the fol-

lowing: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Certainteed Corp. 3. Knauf Fiberglass 4. Manville Corp. 5. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 6. Rubatex Corp.

C. Flame/Smoke Ratings - Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, cover-

ings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of

mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or level, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install

damaged insulation; remove from project site.


230700 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation, ASTM C 1290, minimum k=0.27 at 75°F, Owens Corning SOFTR Type 100 or equal.

B. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation - ASTM C612, Class 1, K value 0.23 at 75F, 3 Lb/Cu

Ft, Owens-Corning 703.

C. Vapor Barrier Material For Ductwork - FS HH-B-100; paper-backed aluminum-foil, except as otherwise indicated; strength and permeability rating equivalent to factory-applied vapor barriers on adjoining ductwork insulation.

D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories - Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles

and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicat-ed.

E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds - Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective

finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

F. Jacketing for ductwork:

1. Aluminum – Smooth Finish, 0.016 in thick 2. PVC – Smooth Finish, 0.016 in thick

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Ductwork (below ambient temperature):

1. Application Requirements - Insulate the following cold ductwork: a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance to end of ductwork in Pump Room

or connection to air compressor. b. HVAC exhaust ductwork from Pump Room or connection to air compressor.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Insulation: Flexible fiberglass; 2" thick. b. Insulation: Rigid fiberglass, 2" thick.

3. Provide jacket over ductwork insulation.

B. Dual Temperature Ductwork:

1. Application Requirements - Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork:

a. Hot/cold supply ductwork between HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlets.


230700 - 3

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Insulation: Flexible fiberglass; 1-1/2" thick. b. Insulation: Rigid fiberglass; 1-1/ 2" thick.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to en-

sure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and

composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping pene-

trations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation.

I. Protect insulation from plant by installing metal or pvc jacketing. Provide screws or rivets

matching jacket at longitudinal joints. Install joints on the bottom of the pipe. Install metal bands at each end joint.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture

and other damage.

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.


230700 - 4

C. Provide jacket over ductwork insulation on all ductwork to and from the Pump room and all ductwork to and from air compressors. Provide screws or rivets matching jacket at longitudi-nal joints. Install joints on the bottom of the pipe. Install metal bands at each end joint.

3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with va-por barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during

remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END SECTION


230900 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of temperature control systems work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this Section.

C. Control wiring, except for power wiring, necessary for DDC temperature control systems, is work of this Section.


A. Provide control systems of one of the following:

1. Honeywell 2. Carrier 3. Johnson Controls 4. Siemans Building Technology (Energy Control & Design) 5. Equal controls provided by manufacturer of HVAC equipment

B. Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by Underwriters' La-

boratories (UL) and comply with NEMA standards.

C. Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric-electronic temperature control systems.

D. Comply with IBC 1101.2/ANSI A117.1-308.2 & 3 for location of mechanical system con-

trols.

E. Include coordination time with test and balance Contractor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's specifications for each control device furnished, in-cluding installation instructions and start-up instructions. At a minimum include:

1. Sequence of Operation 2. Schematic diagram for each control system. 3. Catalog data on each component used

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of control

device. Include this data in maintenance manual. At a minimum include:

1. Sequence of Operation


230900 - 2

2. Wiring Diagram 3. Recommended spare parts list


A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide temperature control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of dampers, thermostats, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard temperature control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as rec-ommended by manufacturer.

2.02 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electric damper actuators shall be modulating or on/off as scheduled. Actuators shall be of proper size to meet the power requirements

B. Outside and exhaust air damper actuators shall fail safe in a normally closed position in the

event of control power failure.

C. The actuators shall be mounted externally of ducts or other equipment wherever possible for ease of service and isolated from internal temperatures.

D. See schedules to determine if dampers come with equipment.

2.03 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Temperature Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or re-quired for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. Sensors must be capable of being calibrated.

1. All temperature sensors shall be electronic resistance type.

2.04 LOW TEMPERATURE PROTECTION THERMOSTATS

A. Provide low-temperature protection thermostats of manual-reset type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products comply-


230900 - 3

ing with requirements of applicable Division 26 sections of these specifications. Mount con-trollers per ADA requirements.

B. The term "wiring" is defined to include pulling of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials

as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices.

C. Wiring System

1. Install complete wiring system for temperature controls. Conceal wiring, except in me-chanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conduc-tors neatly.

2. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room

controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

3. Provide clearance between control wiring and power wiring per manufacturers require-ments, to prevent interference with control system.

3.02 CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. RTU

1. The RTU runs continuously. The controller maintains the room temperature. The outside air damper opens to maintain the required minimum outside air.

2. When cooling is required and the outside temperature is below 55 F the controller will

modulate the outside air and return air dampers to maintain the desired discharge temper-ature.

3. When the outside temperature is above 55 F and cooling is required the outside air

dampers will close to the minimum required outside air. The controller will start cooling in stages.

4. When heating is required the outside air damper will close to its’ minimum position and

the controller will start the stages of heating as needed. 5. Freeze stat shall shut furnace fan off if discharge temperature falls below 45F, and send

an alarm

B. EF-1

1. When the Pump Room temperature exceeds 65°F (adjustable) EF-1 starts and the damp-ers on the outside air duct and exhaust air duct open.

2. When the Pump Room temperature goes below 63°F (adjustable) EF-1 stops and the

dampers on the ductwork close.

3. The dampers are opened by springs and closed by power to the damper motors.


230900 - 4

C. Pump Room Unit Heater

1. Integral thermostat will start unit heater when temperature in the Pump room is below

60°F (adjustable) and stop when the temperature is satisfied.

D. EF-2

1. Fan will run continuously. E. Air Compressor Ductwork (each unit)

1. When the compressor starts the inlet dampers modulate the room air and outside air to maintain the entering air at 65°F (adjustable).

2. A sensor will measure the temperature of the air leaving the compressor. If the plant

wants outlet air from the compressor for heating the damper will modulate to maintain a room temperature of 68°F (adjustable). The damper in the outside air ductwork will modulate open as needed to balance outlet air.

3. The control panel will have an Auto-Manual switch for both the inlet air control and out-

let air control. The control panel will also show the inlet air temperature to the compres-sor and the outlet air temperature from the compressor.

4. When the compressor isn’t running the dampers in the outside air ductwork will close.

3.03 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors, and similar equipment provided as work of this Section.

B. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manu-

facturer of primary temperature control system. 3.05 TRAINING

A. Provide training session for Owners' personnel. Training schedule shall be approved by Owner.

END SECTION


231100 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 11 00 Facility Fuel Piping Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of Contract including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of facility fuel piping systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this Section.

C. Applications for facility fuel piping systems include the following:

1. Connection from existing gas main to gas-fired equipment connection. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Wisconsin Administrative Code SPS 365 Fuel Gas Appliances. B. ANSI Code Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.2 "Fuel Gas Pip-

ing".

C. National Fuel Gas Code Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) "National Fuel Gas Code", and ANSI Z223.1a "Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code".

D. ANSI/AGA LC-1 “Flexible gas tubing for Natural and Propane Piping Systems”

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data for fuel gas piping systems materials and products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure rat-ings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in natural gas pip-ing systems. Where more than 1 type of material or product are indicated, selection is In-staller's option.



B. Building Distribution Piping (5 psi and below)


231100 - 2

1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: a. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A53,type E or S. b. Malleable iron threaded fittings, ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 class 150

2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller:

a. Corrugated stainless steel tubing for Fuel Gas Piping (Verify required pipe size. Cor-rugated stainless steel tubing has smaller interior dimension than schedule 40 pipe.)

b. Mechanical Joint Fittings

2.03 SUPPORTS

A. Provide supports in accordance with the following listing:

1. Clevis hanger or band hangers for horizontal-piping. 2. Concrete anchors and clamps for building attachments.

2.04 SPECIAL VALVES

A. Special valves required for natural gas piping systems include the following types:

1. Gas Cocks 2" and Smaller: 150 psi non-shock WOG, bronze straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded ends.

2. Plug Valves 2" and Smaller: 150 psi non-shock WOG, iron body, bronze plug. 3. Ball Valves 2" and Smaller: 600 psi, bronze body, UL listed, Chrome ball.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gas cocks of one of the fol-

lowing:

1. Apollo 2. DeZurik 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. Powell Co. 5. Grinnell

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING

A. Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings.

B. Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making threaded joints; no hard set-ting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed.

C. Pitch horizontal piping down 1" in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install a 6" minimum

depth dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the top or side of the main.

D. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may

expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building.


231100 - 3

E. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment

F. Install a shut off valve at each appliance. Provide a valved connection at the main for equip-

ment and appliances furnished by others.

G. Piping through a roof shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing.

H. Provide vent limiters for small regulators. For larger regulators provide gas pressure reduc-

ing valve vents and relief valve vents run separately to a point outside of the building, termi-nated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations.

3.02 PIPING TESTS

A. Test natural gas piping in accordance with ANSI B31.2 or other recognized testing procedure.

END SECTION


233100 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this

Section.

C. Types of ductwork required for project include the following:

1. Air conditioning supply and return air systems. 2. Fresh air supply systems. 3. Mechanical exhaust systems.


A. SMACNA Standards - Comply with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of ductwork.

B. NFPA Compliance - Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard For The Installation Of Air-

Conditioning And Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard For The Installation Of Warm Air Heating And Air-Conditioning Systems".

C. Underwriters Laboratories - UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and factory-fabricated duct-work, used for work of this Section.

B. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories, and out-

lets and inlets; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store

outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.


233100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Exposed Ductwork Materials - Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occu-pied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, in-cluding those which would impair painting.

B. Sheet Metal

1. Galvanized Sheet Steel - ANSI/ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A

525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

C. Ductwork Material Selection

1. Except as indicated otherwise provide galvanized sheet metal. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Duct Sealant - Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant. Sealants shall be water resistive, fire resistive, and compatible with mating surfaces

B. Ductwork Support Materials - Hot-dipped galvanized fasteners, anchors, hanger rods, straps,

trim and angles shall be used to support ductwork. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "Duct Construc-tion Standards - Metal and Flexible" Latest Edition.

B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as ap-

plicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius 1.5 times the associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where short-er radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30( for contracting tapers and expanding ta-pers.

C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possi-

ble. Refer to Division 15 section "Duct Accessories" for accessory requirements.

D. Ductwork to and from pump room and all ductwork from connection to compressor to end of duct shall be a minimum of 22 gauge ductwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK

A. Assemble and install ductwork to achieve SMACNA seal Class B and noiseless (no objec-tional noise) systems. Install each run with minimum of joints.


233100 - 3

B. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with inter-nal surfaces smooth.

C. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid

diagonal runs wherever possible.

D. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations ensure ductwork does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

E. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and perma-

nent enclosure elements of building. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clear-ance outside of insulation.

F. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between con-

struction opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".

G. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equip-

ment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

H. Provide a balancing damper at each branch connection off main duct trunks. Balancing dampers are not required on branches serving a single VAV box.

I. Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible"- Latest Edition hangers and supports section. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or any distribution devices at time of

ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

END SECTION


233300 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of contract including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of duct accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by require-

ments of this section.

C. Types of duct accessories required for project include the following:

1. Manual Dampers. 2. Turning Vanes. 3. Duct Hardware. 4. Fire Dampers


A. SMACNA Compliance - Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Condition-ing Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) "Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

B. NFPA Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 90A "Air Condition-

ing and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of duct accessories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of duct accessory, includ-ing dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of duct accessory show-

ing interfacing requirements with ductwork, and method of fastening or support.

C. Maintenance Data - Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory, include this data in Maintenance Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the fol-

lowing:


233300 - 2

1. Greenheck 2. Louvers & Dampers 3. NCA 4. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 5. Vent Products

2.02 TURNING VANES

A. Provide turning vanes constructed of curved blades supported with bars perpendicular to blades and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the

following:

1. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc 2. Hart & Cooley 3. Tuttle & Bailey

2.03 DUCT HARDWARE

A. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements provide duct hardware of one of

the following:

1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co.

2.04 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Static fire damper assemblies must be UL 555 listed and labeled for static applications (where air systems do not operate during a fire)

B. Damper fire rating to be compatible with the rating of the building assembly in which the

damper is used.

C. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire dampers of one of the following:

1. Air Balance 2. American Warming and Ventilating 3. Greenheck 4. Ruskin 5. Safe-Air


233300 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with ap-plicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90° elbows in supply and exhaust air systems,

and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct accessories properly with other work.


A. Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

B. Test for air leakage while system is operating.

C. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof per-formance.

END SECTION


233400 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 34 00 HVAC Fans PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of fan work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this section.

C. Types of fans required for project include the following:

1. Centrifugal ceiling exhausters. 2. In line centrifugal fans.


A. AMCA Compliance - Provide fans which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Sound and Performance. [AMCA Standard 210 and AMCA Standard 300.]

B. UL Compliance - Provide power ventilators which are designed, manufactured, and tested in

accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators".

C. NEMA Compliance - Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical data for fans, including specifications, ca-pacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instruc-tions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construc-

tion details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.

C. Wiring Diagrams - Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and con-trol wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of fan, accessory,

and control. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.


233400 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING EXHAUSTERS

A. Provide centrifugal ceiling exhausters, design for ceiling or wall mounting, of type, size and capacity as scheduled.

B. Galvanized steel housing lined with acoustical insulation, adaptable for ceiling or wall instal-

lation. Provide centrifugal fan wheels mounted on motor shaft with fan shrouds, all remova-ble for service. Provide integral backdraft damper fan discharge.

C. Provide louvered grille as scheduled with thumbscrew attachments to fan housing.

D. Permanent split-capacitor motor, permanently lubricated, with grounded cord and plug.

E. Junction box for electrical connection on housing, and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Furnish solid state fan speed control on fan housing. Provide speed control capable of con-

trolling fan speed from full speed to approximately half speed.

G. Manufacturer – Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal and ceiling ex-hausters of one of the following:

1. Acme Engineering and Mfg. Co. 2. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Carnes Co. 4. Cook Co., Loren 5. Greenheck Fan Corp. 6. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

2.02 IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Provide duct mounted in line centrifugal fans of size, type, and capacity as scheduled and specified herein.

B. Fan housing shall be galvanized steel construction with duct mounting collars on each end. C. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include

a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances.

1. Wheel cone and fan inlet shall be matched for precise running tolerances. 2. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

D. Motor shall be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan

applications.

1. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal.


233400 - 3

2. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase.

B. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated

pillow block ball bearings.

1. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maxi-mum cataloged operating speed.

C. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide in line centrifugal fans of

one of the following:

1. Acme Engineering and Mfg. Co. 2. Aerovent, Inc. 3. Carnes Co 1. Cook Co., Loren 2. Greenheck Fan Corp. 3. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which fans are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, Industry Standards.

B. Coordinate fan work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings, as necessary for proper inter-facing.

C. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

D. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal.

E. Verify proper rotation direction of fan wheels. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until

wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

F. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free operation.


A. After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct mal-functioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be sat-isfactorily corrected.

END SECTION


233700 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of contract including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements

of this Section.

C. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 2. Wall registers and grilles. 3. Louvers.


A. ASHRAE Standards - Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) Standard 70 "Methods Of Testing For Rating The Air Flow Performance Of Outlets and Inlets".

B. ADC Test Code - Comply with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062R4

"Certification, Rating and Test Manual".

C. AMCA Standards - Comply with Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Standard 500 "Test Method For Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".

D. ANSI/NFPA Standards - Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard

90A "Installation Of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".

E. ARI Standard - Comply with Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 650 - "Air Outlets and Inlets".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data on outlets and inlets including the following:

1. Schedule of outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2. Data sheet for each type of outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construc-

tion, finish, and mounting details.

3. Performance data for each type of outlet and inlet furnished, including throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.


233700 - 2

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance instructions, including cleaning instructions for fin-ishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data in maintenance manuals.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work

traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated on schedule; constructed of materials and components as indicated on schedule.

B. Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings

for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling sys-tems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.

D. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the fol-

lowing:

1. Donco 2. Metal Aire 3. Krueger Mfg. Co. 4. Price 5. Titus

2.02 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capac-

ity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated on schedule.

B. Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's cur-rent data.

C. Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall sys-

tems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.


233700 - 3

D. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one

of the following:

1. Metal Aire 2. Krueger 3. Price 4. Titus.

2.03 LOUVERS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indi-cated; constructed of materials and components as indicated.

B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as

listed in manufacturer's current data, as called out on drawing.

C. Provide louvers with frames and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and ade-quate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

D. Construct of aluminum extrusions, ANSI/ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use

stainless steel fasteners.

E. On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.

F. Provide baked enamel finish, color as indicated

G. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers of one of the fol-

lowing:

1. American Warming & Ventilating Inc. 2. Carnes Co 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Greenheck 5. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 6. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 7. Vent Products Co., Inc.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not pro-ceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.


233700 - 4

B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform

with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. 3.03 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, operating keys for each type of outlet and inlet that requires them.

END SECTION


237400 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 74 00 Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of outdoor heating and cooling units work required by this section is indicated on

drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

C. Types of Outdoor HVAC Equipment specified in this section include the following:

1. Cooling and gas-fired heating.

D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following; not work of this Section:

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on outdoor heating and cooling units. Including disconnects except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.

E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section complying with requirements of

Division 26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control pan-els.


A. ARI Compliance - Test and rate outdoor heating and cooling units under 135,000 btu/hr ca-pacity in accordance with ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal. Sound test and rate units in accordance with ARI 270 "Stand-ard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal.

B. ASHRAE Compliance - Construct refrigerating system of outdoor heating and cooling units

in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

C. ASHRAE Compliance - Provide Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of outdoor heating and cool-ing units not less than prescribed by latest ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".

D. UL Compliance - Provide outdoor heating and cooling units which are designed, manufac-

tured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.

E. AGA Compliance - Construct gas-fired furnace sections in accordance with AGA safety standards, and provide AGA label.


237400 - 2

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of se-lected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,

weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Wiring Diagrams - Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for outdoor heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for in-terlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for each outdoor heating and

cooling unit, control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. In-clude this data and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle outdoor heating and cooling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged outdoor heating and cooling units or components; replace with new.

B. Store outdoor heating and cooling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from

weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading outdoor heat-ing and cooling units, and moving them to final location.

1.05 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Warranty On Compressor and Heat Exchanger - Provide written warranty, signed by manu-facturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and/or heat ex-changers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's in-structions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to dur-ing warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.

B. Warranty Period - 5 years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Provide factory-assembled and tested outdoor units as indicated, designed for roof or slab mounting, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator


237400 - 3

fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Provide capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled.

B. Provide manufacturer's standard casing construction, corrosion protection coating, and exte-

rior finish. Provide removable panels and/or access doors for inspection and access to inter-nal parts. Insulate casing with 1" thick minimum thermal insulation. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. Provide condensate drain connection.

C. Provide direct drive Van Axial fan with ECM motor.

D. Provide propeller-type, direct-driven condenser fans with permanently lubricated bearings. E. Evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum lanced plate fins mechanically bonded

to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazed. F. Blower fan shall be a Vane Axial fan with direct drive motor.

G. Unit shall use fully hermetic, two stage scroll compressor on a single refrigeration circuit.

Compressors shall be protected from an over-temperature and over-amperage conditions by an internal, motor overload device. Compressor shall be factory mounted on rubber grom-mets.

H. Gas heater shall have induced draft design heat exchanger. Heat exchanger shall incorporate a

direct-spark ignition system and redundant main gas valve.

1. Heat exchanger shall be of the tubular-section type constructed of a minimum of 20-gage steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum-silicone alloy for corrosion resistance

2. Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of aluminum-coated steel.

I. Economizer shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air. Shall be equipped with a

barometric relief damper capable of relieving up to 100% return air and contain seals that meet ASHRAE 90.1 requirements.

J. Provide insulated adapter curb under unit, constructed in accordance with NRCA Standards.

Provide seal strip between curb and unit, and wood nailer for flashing.

K. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide outdoor units of one of the following:

1. Carrier Air 2. Daikin 3. Greenheck 4. Trane Co. 5. York



237400 - 4

A. Examine areas and conditions under which outdoor heating and cooling units are to be in-stalled. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted.

Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

D. Start-up outdoor units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls

and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or controls and equip-ment.

3.03 GROUNDING

A. Provide positive equipment ground for outdoor heating and cooling unit components. 3.04 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 1-half day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

B. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and A/E of training

date. 3.05 SPARE PARTS

1. Furnish 2 sets of filters for each unit.

END SECTION


238129 - 1

DIVISION 23 - HVAC Section 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Systems work is indicated by drawings and

schedules, and by requirements of this section.

C. Types of VRF units required for project include the following:

1. Air cooled VRF condensing unit 2. VRF fan coil unit


A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. All units must meet or exceed the latest ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF sys-tems. Efficiency shall be published in accordance with the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 1230.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data showing dimensions, capacities, furnished com-ponents and power requirements

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty for equipment and 5 year compressor warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Unit Cabinet:

1. Unit casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished.

B. Fan: 1. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and

be completely variable speed.


238129 - 2

C. Coil: 1. The heat exchanger shall be of zinc coated aluminum construction with turbulating flat

tube construction. 2. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 3. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven

compressor.

D. Compressor:

1. Each unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s). 3. Compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be complete-

ly variable with a turndown of 15%-5% of rated capacity, depending upon unit size. 4. Compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 5. Compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. 6. Refrigeration circuit in unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and

controls.

E. Accessories

1. System Controller. 2. Copper line sets with Unicellular pipe insulation.

2.02 FAN COIL UNITS

A. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with per-manently lubricated bearings.

2. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High.

B. Coil:

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tub-ing.

2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.

3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.


238129 - 3

5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. Provide a condensate pump when scheduled.

C. Controls:

1. Fan control must be capable of changing speeds based on space air conditioning load.

2. Provide wireless remote controller

2.05 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide VRF Systems of one of the following:

1. Mitsubishi 2. Samsung 3. Daikin 4. Other Manufacturers with prior approval

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF VRF Systems

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork. 3.02 VRF SYSTEM PIPING

A. Standard ACR fittings rated for use with R410A shall be used for all connections. B. Refer to recommend piping specifications in manufacturer’s engineering manual.

END SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.



B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.


A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. General Cable Co.

2. Rome Cable Co.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719.

2. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

3. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854.

4. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.

5. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

6. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83.

7. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493.

8. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. 3M Electrical Products.

2. Thomas and Betts

C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set

screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.

2. Type: One hole with standard barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single

conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. 120V GFCI protected circuits, or circuits with 15/20A GFCI protected outlets: Dedicated

neutral and ground conductors shall be installed for each circuit with GFCI protection or GFCI

devices installed.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.


C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct

connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.

2) Calibrated torque wrench.

3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

d. Inspect for correct identification.

e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.

Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V

rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.


CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backboards.

2. Category 5e twisted pair cable.

3. Category 6 twisted pair cable.

4. Category 6a twisted pair cable.

5. Twisted pair cabling hardware.

6. Control-circuit conductors.

7. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are

connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from

heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.







A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to

supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products

according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in

plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches (1520 mm) or less.

2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.

3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As

determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

D. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum

Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

E. RoHS compliant.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm).

Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with grey latex paint. Comply with requirements

in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2.3 CATEGORY 5e TWISTED PAIR CABLE – PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission

characteristics of Category 5e cable at frequencies up to 100 MHz.



1. Belden Cable.

2. Commscope.


3. Superior Essex

C. Standard: Comply with ICEA S-90-661, NEMA WC 63.1, and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 5e

cables.

D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 24 AWG solid copper.

E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).

F. Cable Rating: Plenum.

G. Jacket: Color to be per Outagamie County Standards, thermoplastic.

2.4 CATEGORY 6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE – PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS


characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.



1. Belden Cable.

2. Commscope.

3. Superior Essex

C. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6

cables.





2.5 CATEGORY 6a TWISTED PAIR CABLE – PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS


characteristics of Category 6a cable at frequencies up to 500MHz.



1. Belden Cable.

2. Commscope.

3. Superior Essex

C. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6a cables.






2.6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE – PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper

communications cable.



1. Belden Cable.

2. Commscope.

3. Superior Essex

C. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:

1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6, Category 6a, or Category 7,

per Outagamie County standards.

2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or

tools.

3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

D. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables

terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare, integral with connector bodies, including plugs

and jacks where indicated.

E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and

permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for

termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.

2. Comply with IEC 60603-7-1, IEC 60603-7-2, IEC 60603-7-3, IEC 60603-7-4, and

IEC 60603-7.5.

3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for

termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.

2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.

3. Standards:


a. Category 5e, unshielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7-2.

b. Category 5e, shielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7-3.

c. Category 6, unshielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7-4.

d. Category 6, shielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7.5.

e. Category 6a, unshielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7-41.

f. Category 6a, shielded twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC 60603-7.51.

4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

H. Faceplate:

1. Six port, vertical single-gang faceplates designed to mount to single-gang wall boxes.

2. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring

Devices."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber,

and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

I. Legend:

1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.7 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Encore Wire Corporation.

2. General Cable.

B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in

raceway.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in

raceway.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2,

complying with UL 83 in raceway.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical

Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.


A. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.


B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as

supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and

2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is

installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around

perimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches (75 mm) above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent

sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.


2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems."

3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced.

5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more

than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and

terminals.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5,

"Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use

heat lamps for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling

Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

10. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.

11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. Twisted Pair Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.

2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 271513 "Communications Copper

Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) at the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry.

D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm)

above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches (760 mm) apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or

other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and

corrugated panels.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including

electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:


a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches

(127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches (305 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24

inches (600 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2

inches (64 mm).


inches (150 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches (305 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall

be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.


inches (75 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

(150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches (127 mm).

3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those

installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified with a tag for future use.

3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for


B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-

606-B; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with

UL 969.


A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings.

Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect

cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test

cables after termination, but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in its

"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy

specified in its "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords

and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link

test configuration.

C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is

formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument

to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.


2.2 MANUFACTURERS



1. Burndy.

2. ILSCO.

3. Siemens Industry Inc.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions for main grounding connections.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression exothermic-

type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar for connections to

other than main grounding conductors.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.


H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, aluminum or copper rated for direct burial terminal

with set screw.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud

lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.

K. Straps: Solid copper, rated for 600 A.

L. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp.

M. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

N. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated or stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

b. Listed for direct burial.

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector or copper ground

connector rated for direct burial.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m).

1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200

mm) long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

B. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, hot-dip galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On

feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,

with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two

bands of yellow.


D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit

or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway

fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a

separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

C. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.


3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

F. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct

contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.




1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test

wells, where present, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any

conductors are connected.


a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Aluminum slotted support systems.

3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

4. Conduit and cable support devices.

5. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

6. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

7. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and

hanger rods.

8. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.

b. Clamps.

c. Hangers.

d. Sockets.

e. Eye nuts.

f. Fasteners.

g. Anchors.

h. Saddles.

i. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support

systems.

1. Hangers. Include product data for components.


2. Slotted support systems.

3. Equipment supports.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames

for equipment mounting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-

(10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. B-Line

b. Haydon Corp.

c. Thomas & Betts

2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.

4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

6. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

7. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-4.

8. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

9. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded-aluminum channels and angles with minimum

13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one

surface.




the following:

a. Cooper Industries, Inc.

b. Haydon Corp.

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.


3. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

4. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy.





MFMA-4.




C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8

inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least one surface.



the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit

b. B-Line.

c. Haydon Corp.



4. Fittings and Accessories: Products provided by channel and angle manufacturer and

designed for use with those items.

5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as those for channels and angles.

6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.



D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for

types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.


F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Hilti, Inc

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head

3) MKT Fastening, LLC

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.




1) B-Line

2) Hilti, Inc.


3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers

and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:


1. NECA 1.

2. NECA 101

3. NECA 102.

4. NECA 105.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems

above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)


thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs

less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with

MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting", Section 099123

"Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous

metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and

handholes serving communications systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Manufacturers: Contractors Option.


2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

a. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

7. FMC (MC Cable): Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

8. LFMC (Liquidtight): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings:


2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

5. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and

NFPA 70.

6. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Setscrew.

7. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Nonmetallic Conduit:


2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

3. Fiberglass:

a. Comply with NEMA TC 14.


b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways.

c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

4. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

5. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

6. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

7. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

8. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

9. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with

ASTM D 3485.

10. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

B. Nonmetallic Fittings:


2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type

and material.

a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Contractors option.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, or

Type 12 as required by project conditions, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged or screw type cover, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS



1. Crouse-Hinds.

2. Hoffman.


3. MonoSystems, Inc.

4. Thomas & Betts Corp.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb

(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)

shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb

(32 kg).

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep)

K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or

Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch as project conditions dictate.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, RNC, type EPC-40-PVC, or RNC, type EPC-80-PVC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, type EPC-40-PVC, or RNC, type EPC-80-PVC.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm)

of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all

directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.


M. Use PVC coated GRC conduit for bends in applications where NMC PVC conduit is used.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use

roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end

of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in

use.

R. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

S. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25

feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where

environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has

straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

(70 deg C) temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.


3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)

of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and

contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F

(0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for

metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

center of box unless otherwise indicated.

W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150

mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and

complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth

Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.


a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm)

on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated

grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS



Cabling."

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal

joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.


CABLING

260544 - 2

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, where allowed by the AHJ.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms, where allowed by the

AHJ.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3

mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one

or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5

mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. 3M

b. Advance Products & Systems, Inc

c. Metraflex Company

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.



the following:


CABLING

260544 - 3

a. 3M




2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.


CABLING

260544 - 4

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm)

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for

installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.

2. Labels.

3. Bands and tubes.

4. Tapes and stencils.

5. Tags.

6. Signs.

7. Cable ties.

8. Paint for identification.

9. Fasteners for labels and signs.




and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system

components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components

used in identification signs and labels.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.


D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Comply with FPA 70E and Section 260574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study"

requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material

surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed

below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown.

b. Phase B: Orange.

c. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Color for Neutral: White.

5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Bare copper, or Green.

6. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.

C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."


2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES

(915 MM)."

E. Equipment Identification Labels:


2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Brother International

c. Ideal Industries, Inc.

B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with

diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Brother International.


C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, polyester flexible label

with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Brother International.


2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective

shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed

legend.

3. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by

printer manufacturer.


D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor,

weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and

location.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Brother International Corp.


2. Minimum Nominal Size:

a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches (37 by 150 mm) for raceway and conductors.

b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) for equipment.

c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES

A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2

inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping

action.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Hellermann Tyton.

c. Marking Services, Inc.

B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed

identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs

at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Hellermann Tyton.


2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.




the following:

a. Hellermann Tyton

b. Ideal Industries, Inc.


B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Carlon.

C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers placed

diagonally over orange background and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.



the following:

a. Hellerman Tyton

b. Marking Services, Inc.

D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape,

with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Carlon.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape:



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Ideal Industries, Inc.


2. Tape:


a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to

identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation

when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found

in soils.

3. Color and Printing:

a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and

ANSI Z535.5.

b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE"

c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

4. Tag: Type ID:

a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film,

a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the

continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side

with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).

c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).

d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).

e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).

f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N) and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa).

F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be

1 inch (25 mm).

2.6 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped

legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.



the following:

a. Brady Corp

b. Carlton Industries, LP.


B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, color-coded for

phase and voltage level, with factory screened permanent designations; punched for use with

self-locking cable tie fastener.



the following:


a. Brady Corp



C. Write-on Tags:



the following:

a. Brady Corp



2. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable

tie for attachment.

3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.7 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:



the following:

a. Carlton Industries, LP.

b. Champion America.

2. Preprinted aluminum signs, high-intensity reflective, punched or drilled for fasteners,

with colors, legend, and size required for application.

3. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

4. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:



the following:

a. Brady Corp


2. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-

inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors,

legend, and size required for application.




C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:



the following:

a. Brady Corp


2. Engraved legend.

3. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.

c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in

corners for mounting.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 CABLE TIES



1. Hellermann Tyton

2. Ideal Industries, Inc.

3. Marking Services, Inc.

B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and

Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,

self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.



MPa).


4. Color: Black.

D. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking.



2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa).

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean

substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation

and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance

of electrical systems and connected items.

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely

encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.


H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

I. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

J. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the

following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be

as follows:

1. "POWER."

2. "UPS."

K. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive

appropriate to the location and substrate.

L. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

M. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

N. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,

schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high

letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels

2 inches (50 mm) high.

O. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

P. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

Q. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

R. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 6 inches (150 mm) where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of

tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

S. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and

paint application.


T. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written

instructions.

U. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly

above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

V. Metal Tags:

1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Secure using general-purpose, UV-stabilized, or plenum-rated cable ties.

W. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags:



X. Write-on Tags:



Y. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the

location and substrate.


letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required,

use signs minimum 2 inches (50 mm) high.

Z. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:




letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels


AA. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:




letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels


BB. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:


1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to

provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points,

and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits, More Than 30A and 120V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-

foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum

intervals in congested areas.

D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each

junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring

system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "POWER."

2. "UPS."

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations,

provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Marker tape that is uniform and

consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,

communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.

I. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape or tape and stencil to finished surfaces. Show

working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with

NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

J. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded

conductors.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive labels.


1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power-transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.

M. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels.

N. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.

3. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-

adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchboards.

e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

g. Enclosed switches.

h. Enclosed controllers.

i. Variable-speed controllers.

j. Push-button stations.

k. Contactors.

l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

m. Monitoring and control equipment.


OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY 260572 - 1

SECTION 260572 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting

capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices

submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution

equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in

equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary


submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and

associated characteristics is satisfactory.

b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of

short-circuit study.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Manufacturers: As determined by the design professional. Software to comply with the latest

IEEE 399 and IEEE 551 requirements and be of the latest version of software available.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability

to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and

guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram and drawings, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Cable size and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.

4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.

2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties.

3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.


4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors

at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to

or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the

Evaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage.

b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.

c. Fault-point X/R ratio.

d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.

b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.


d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.

2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.

3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.



d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.

e. Equivalent impedance.

f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.

g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.


1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to

the attention of Architect.

2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under

the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For any relocated equipment and/or that which is existing to remain, obtain required

electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by

qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall

be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with

recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the

field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in

charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds

NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent

protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent

with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,

input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance.

6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated

kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material.

9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent

protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.


F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout

electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and

alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous

motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase

ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the

asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as

defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each

of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point.

2. Incoming switchgear.

3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.

4. Low-voltage switchgear.

5. Motor-control centers.

6. Control panels.

7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.

8. Branch circuit panelboards.

9. Disconnect switches.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit study.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.


OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 1

SECTION 260574 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance

and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical

equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective

devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution

equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in

equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary


submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and

associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the

equipment manuals.

2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's

personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Manufacturers: As determined by the design professional. Software to comply with the latest

IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E requirements and be of the latest version of the software available.

2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

C. One-line diagram and drawings, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Cable size and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.

4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-

Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device

Short-Circuit Study."

F. Arc-Flash Study Output:


1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.



d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.

e. Equivalent impedance.

f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.

g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

G. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude.

2. Protective device clearing time.

3. Duration of arc.

4. Arc-flash boundary.

5. Working distance.

6. Incident energy.

7. Hazard risk category.

8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

H. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of

terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self-

adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) self-adhesive equipment

label for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH

HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard

analysis:

1. Location designation.

2. Nominal voltage.

3. Flash protection boundary.

4. Hazard risk category.

5. Incident energy.

6. Working distance.

7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only

after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that

have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies:

1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in

"Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective

Device Short-Circuit Study."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and

shall assume no motor load.

2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and

shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical

distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated

arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

F. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when

performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall

take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or

decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as

follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five

cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match

the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent

magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

G. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.

2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

H. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum

clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.


3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call

discrepancies to the attention of Architect/Engineer.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action

submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution

system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and

engineers.

B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply

with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required

to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control

of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its

representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing

Level III certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved

in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags

that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective

device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.

5. Full-load current of all loads.

6. Voltage level at each bus.

7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift.

8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.

9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker

settings.

10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated

kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,

potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

12. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material.

13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

14. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic).

3.4 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and

disconnects and for each of the following locations:

1. Switchgear.


2. Control panel.

3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash

Study Specialist.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential

arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the

arc-flash warning labels.


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.

2. Photoelectric switches.

3. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

4. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.

5. Lighting contactors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch

occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show installation details for the following:

a. Occupancy sensors.

b. Vacancy sensors.

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control

devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of lighting control software.

b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES



1. Intermatic Inc.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Inc.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying

with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Contact Configuration: DPST or DPDT.

3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.

4. Programming: Coordinate with the owner for programming time schedules to be input

into the timer.

5. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.

6. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Contractors Option.

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA inductive, to operate

connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A, and

compatible with ballasts and LED lamps.



intended location and application.

2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for

turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.

5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky

exposure.

6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.

C. Single Fixture or Luminaire mounted Photoelectric Switch Description: Solid state, with SPST

or DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA inductive, to operate connected load, complying with

UL 773, and compatible with CFL and LED lamps.



2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for

turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.

5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS



1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Eaton.

3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.

4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

5. Lithonia Lighting

6. Sensor Switch, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Wall or Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

2. Passive infrared, Ultrasonic, or Dual technology.

3. Integrated or Separate power pack.

4. Hardwired connection to switch.



6. Operation:

a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area

is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.


7. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.

8. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for

13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA,

Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

9. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

10. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal

operation of sensor.

11. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

12. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights

off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and

movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).

2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular

area of 500 or 2000 sq. ft. (46 or 186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)

high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of

reflected ultrasonic energy.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12

inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12

inches/s (305 mm/s).

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of

600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area

of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of

2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m)

when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet

(4.3 m).

6. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-

degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 500 square feet (55 square meters)

when mounted 84 inches (2100 mm) above finished floor.

E. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR

and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that

control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.


2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm),

and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm)

in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305

mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area

of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-

degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 500 or 2000 sq. ft. (46 or 186 sq. m)

when mounted 48 inches (1200 mm) above finished floor.

2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS



1. Square-D.

2. Eaton.

3. General Electric, Inc.

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held type lighting contactors, complying

with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,

including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or

less THD of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the

point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.

4. Provide with control and pilot devices as required, matching the NEMA type specified

for the enclosure.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not

smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are

wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be

installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION


3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION


B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."


1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry

has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual

occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy

hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set

time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's

operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.


LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 1

SECTION 262213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary

rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.




and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging and transformer.

1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after

inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that

provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging.

B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging.

C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control

of temperature and humidity.

D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company

3. Siemens Industry

4. Square-D

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.


1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.

2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.


2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70

B. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

1. One leg per phase.

2. Grounded to enclosure.

C. Coils: Continuous windings except for taps.

1. Coil Material: Aluminum.

2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

3. Terminal Connections: Welded.

D. Interior Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal

out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.

4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

E. Exterior Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound,

sealing out moisture and air.

2. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.

3. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

F. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below

normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps

below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation

system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system

with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

K. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer

enclosure.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals.


2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.

M. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor-rated transformers.

N. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to

IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:

1. 9.00 kVA and Less: 40 dBA.

2. 9.01 to 30.00 kVA: 45 dBA.

3. 30.01 to 50.00 kVA: 45 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9, 48 dBA for K-factors of 13 and

20.

4. 50.01 to 150.00 kVA: 50 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9, 53 dBA for K-factors of 13

and 20.


and 20.


and 20.

7. 500.01 to 700.00: 62 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9, 65 dBA for K-factors of 13 and

20.

8. 700.01 to 1000.00kVA: 64 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9, 67 dBA for K-factors of 13

and 20.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Nameplates: Self-adhesive label for each distribution transformer. Self-adhesive labels are

specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections and at all tap

connections.

2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections.

4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage connections.

5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated voltage

connections.

6. Applied and induced tensile tests.

7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.

8. Insulation-Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.

b. Low-voltage to ground.

c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.


B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding

and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5

ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers

for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer

manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual

transformer provided.

B. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" or

Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers

according to manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers

and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified with concrete.

C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce

noise generation.

E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate

sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

Keep if owner provides testing agency.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Keep if

contractor hires independent testing agency

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Keep for

factory authorized rep does tests

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Small (Up to 167-kVA Single-Phase or 500-kVA Three-Phase) Dry-Type Transformer Field

Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been

removed.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.

f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.

g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-

ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence

of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate

polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.


c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more

than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test

fails, replace the transformer.

d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after

energization and prior to loading.

F. Large (Larger Than 167-kVA Single Phase or 500-kVA Three Phase) Dry-Type Transformer

Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been

removed.


e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.

f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.

g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.


a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-

ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence

of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate

polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.

c. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings.

d. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more

than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test

fails, replace the transformer.

e. Perform an excitation-current test on each phase.

f. Perform an applied voltage test on all high- and low-voltage windings to ground.

See IEEE C57.12.91, Sections 10.2 and 10.9.

g. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after

energization and prior to loading.

G. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

H. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of

transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at

11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning

observations after remedial action.


I. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than

nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap

settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.


PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

F. SPD: Surge protective device.

G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

H. ERMS: Energy reducing maintenance switch.

I. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,

equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD when factory installed in panelboard.

8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.


9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

11. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an

Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.

12. Energy Reducing Maintenance Switch (ERMS)


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:


a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus

104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of

proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and

Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 5.


2. Height: 84 inches (2.13 m) maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts

and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating

with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat

and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

F. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.

G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective

devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance

applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in

gutter.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.

6. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

7. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

I. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting


and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,

wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company

for exact requirements.

J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,

filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Ten percent.

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or

manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an

NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.

1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings,

but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as

shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.

L. Service Entrance Rating: Panelboards intended for use as service entrance equipment shall

contain from one to six service disconnecting means with overcurrent protection, a neutral bus

with disconnecting link, a grounding electrode conductor terminal, and a main bonding jumper.

M. Energy Reducing Maintenance Switch (ERMS): Factory installed ERMS device with separate

switch to reduce the clearing time of a circuit breaker while working within an arc-flash

boundary. 1200A and above

2.2 POWER PANELBOARDS



1. Square D.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only according to listings on the plans.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Plug-in circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.


2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



1. Cutler Hammer, Inc.

2. General Electric Company

3. Siemens Industry, Inc.

4. Square D.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



1. Square D.

B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.

c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.

d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.

e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip.

f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.

g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.


4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers (where required by code): Comply with

UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.

9. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting

circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.

f. Rating Plugs: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater than 150 amperes

shall have interchangeable rating plugs or electronic adjustable trip units.

g. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle or factory

assembled to operate as a single unit.

h. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.

i. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Typed or computer printed circuit directory card inside panelboard door,

mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it

from all other circuits.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.


B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that

equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified

in NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have

been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

F. Mount top of top-most circuit breaker no higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor

unless otherwise indicated.

G. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

H. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.


I. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch (16 mm) in depth. Orient

steel slotted supports vertically.

J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges in accordance with the settings listing in

the coordination study report (when included in the project scope).

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque

wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

L. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

M. Stub four 1-inch (25 mm) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or

space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (25 mm) empty conduits into

raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

N. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten

directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate

complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for


E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.


2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air

circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6

Circuit Breakers. Do not perform optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after

remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as


B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. Prior to making circuit changes

to achieve load balancing, inform Architect of effect on phase color coding.

1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations.

2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility operation

schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services such as fax

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal facility

operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to achieve load

balancing.

4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall not

exceed 20 percent.


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Straight-blade convenience, hospital-grade, isolated-ground, and tamper-resistant

receptacles.

2. GFCI receptacles.

3. Twist-locking receptacles.

4. Pendant cord-connector devices.

5. Cord and plug sets.

6. Toggle switches.

7. Decorator-style convenience.

8. Wall switch sensor light switches with dual technology sensors.

9. Wall switch sensor light switches with passive infrared sensors.

10. Wall switch sensor light switches with ultrasonic sensors.

11. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems.

3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc.

4. Pass & Seymour, P&S: Pass & Seymour/Legrand.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.


G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking

wall plates.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a



C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section

3. Devices are acceptable for installation in the particular location they are to be installed

and in compliance with state and local codes.

D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.


2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.



the following:

a. Cooper

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. P&S

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.



the following:

a. Cooper

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. P&S

2. Description: Labeled and complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article,

"Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, feed-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943

Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:



the following:

a. Cooper

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. P&S


C. Tamper-Resistant, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:



the following:

a. Cooper

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. P&S

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Twist-Lock, Single Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.



the following:

a. Cooper

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. P&S

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.

2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.

3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip.

4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for

corresponding connector.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the

equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.


2.7 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Single Pole:




1) Cooper

2) Hubbell

3) Leviton

4) P&S

2. Two Pole:




1) Cooper

2) Hubbell

3) Leviton

4) P&S

3. Three Way:




1) Cooper

2) Hubbell

3) Leviton

4) P&S

4. Four Way:




1) Cooper

2) Hubbell

3) Leviton

4) P&S


2.8 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, DUAL TECHNOLOGY

A. Manufacturers: See plans for occupancy sensor detail and schedule for a list of acceptable

manufacturers.

B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch

lighting-control unit using dual technology.

1. Connections: Hard wired.

2. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 A at 277-V ac for

fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac.

3. Integral relay for connection to BAS.

4. Adjustable time delay of 30 minutes.

5. Able to be locked to Automatic-On mode.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux).

7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

2.9 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, PASSIVE INFRARED


manufacturers.

B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination, lighting-control sensor and conventional switch

lighting-control unit using passive infrared technology.









2.10 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, ULTRASONIC


manufacturers.

B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination, lighting-control sensor and conventional switch

lighting-control unit using ultrasonic technology.










2.11 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover; weatherproof while in use type.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Color to be selected during shop

drawing process, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside

of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.


2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

10. Install tamper resistant receptacles in areas identified in NFPA 70 (NEC) Section 406 and

in accordance with state and local codes that modify or supersede NFPA 70 even if the

plans do not indicate the installation of such devices.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right. Match existing mounting configuration for remodeling or

addition to existing facilities.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Device Plates in Masonry Construction: Use oversized plates.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.


3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers

or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits.

b. Enclosed controllers.

c. Enclosed switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the

Project. Submit in PDF format.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C)

or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment

factors to fuse ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



FUSES 262813 - 2

1. Bussmann

2. Edison

3. Littlefuse

4. Mersen

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source

from single manufacturer.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage

ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting.

4. Type CD: 600-V, 31- to 60-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting.

5. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

6. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

7. Type T: 600-V, zero- to 800-A rating, 200 kAIC, very fast acting.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size

and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically

damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

FUSES 262813 - 3

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class L, fast acting, Class T, fast acting.

2. Feeders: Class L, fast acting.

3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

4. Large Motor Branch (601-4000 A): Class L, time delay.

5. Power Electronics Circuits: Class J, high speed.

6. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

7. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.

8. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of

door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:


a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and

circuit breakers.

b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of

overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.




1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding

104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.


B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.


2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Square D.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:

1. Single throw.

2. Three pole, unless noted otherwise.

3. 600-V ac.

4. 1200 A and smaller.

5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate

specified fuses.

6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in

closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum

neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate

before switch blades open. Contact rating - 24-V ac.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Square D.


B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and

interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum

neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate

before switch blades open. Contact rating - 24-V ac.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to

comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned,

phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1), gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned,

phosphatized galvannealed steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12), or a brush finish on Type 304

stainless steel (NEMA 250 Type 4-4X stainless steel).

C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts.

NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both

endwalls.

D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with

the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover, directly operable

through the front cover of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 1), or directly operable through the

dead front trim of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 3R). The cover interlock mechanism shall

have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock

mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool

used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in

order to override the interlock.

E. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K shall have a dual

cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the

circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is

open.

F. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit to allow their

use in outdoor and wet location applications.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions

as satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of

proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and

Owner's written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the

following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless


C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.


D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Tests and Inspections for Switches:



b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

c. Verify that the unit is clean.

d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.

e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings.

f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar

bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12.

a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use

NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the

Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.

j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding

surfaces.



a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches

by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall

not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's

published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles

or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage

in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's

published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of

insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended

in manufacturer's published data.

d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each

other by more than 15 percent.

e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection

Systems, Low-Voltage."

C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


1. Test procedures used.

2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test

results.

3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as



MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262913.03 - 1

SECTION 262913.03 - MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual motor controllers.

2. Enclosed full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

3. Combination full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

4. Enclosures.

5. Accessories.

6. Identification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. NC: Normally closed.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SCPD: Short-circuit protective device.


A. Shop Drawings: For each type of magnetic controller.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for signal, and control

wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate

installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and


circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For magnetic controllers to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Routine maintenance requirements for magnetic controllers and installed

components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and

MCP trip settings.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

d. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been

installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor

nameplate full-load currents.

e. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after

motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for

motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed.

5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.




1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical

damage.


A. Ambient Environment Ratings: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following


1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) and not exceeding 104

deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m) for electromagnetic and manual devices.

3. The effect of solar radiation is not significant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and

UL 60947-4-1.

C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Motor-Starting Switches (MSS): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action;

marked to show whether unit is off or on.



the following:

a. Square D.

2. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

3. Configuration: Nonreversing.

4. Flush or Surface mounting, depending on where the unit is installed.

5. Red pilot light.


B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers (FHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or

push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



the following:

a. Square D.


3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Pilot Light: Red.

C. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers (IHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-

button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



the following:

a. Square D.


3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

2.3 ENCLOSED FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Across-the-line start, electrically held, for nominal system voltage of 600-V ac and

less.



1. Square D.

C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration: Nonreversing.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors when required.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power:


1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

2. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection.

b. Sensors in each phase.

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

2.4 COMBINATION FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. Description: Factory-assembled, combination full-voltage magnetic motor controller consisting

of the controller described in this article, indicated disconnecting means, SCPD and OCPD, in a

single enclosure.



1. Square D.

C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration: Nonreversing.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors when required.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power:

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:


a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

2. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection.

b. Sensors in each phase.

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

H. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate indicated fuses.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with

environmental conditions at installed location.

B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6.

C. Controllers in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with UL 1203.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, except as needed to

match enclosure type. Heavy-duty or oil-tight where indicated in the controller schedule.

a. Push Buttons: As indicated in the controller schedule.

b. Pilot Lights: As indicated in the controller schedule.

B. Breather assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4

enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and

temperature swings.

C. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to

direct and extended sun exposure.


2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Controller Nameplates: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as described in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with

corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Arc-Flash Warning Labels:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 260574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash

Study." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (89-by-127-mm) self-adhesive equipment label for each

work location included in the analysis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for motor controllers,

their relationship with the motors, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels

bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.

E. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as

shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for

motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.


a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.


e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation.

2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to

manufacturer's published data.

f. Motor-Running Protection:

1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.

2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance

values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate

from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.


a. For the contactor and circuit breaker, perform insulation-resistance tests for one

minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and

across each open pole. Insulation-resistance values shall be according to

manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.1. In the absence of

manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.5. Values of insulation resistance less

than those of this table or manufacturer's recommendations shall be investigated

and corrected.

b. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each

other by more than 15 percent.

c. Test motor protection devices according to manufacturer's published data.

d. Test circuit breakers as follows:

1) Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.


2) For adjustable circuit breakers, adjust protective device settings according to

the coordination study. Comply with coordination study recommendations.

e. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

C. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.


LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:

1. Materials.

2. Finishes.

3. Luminaire support.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.

5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.

6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The

adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the

luminaire as applied in this Project.


a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation

and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.




1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

2. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.

3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that


B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. Standards:

1. ENERGY STAR certified.

2. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.

3. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

C. CRI of minimum 70. CCT as indicated on the fixture schedule on the plans.

D. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac, or as specified on the fixture schedule on the plans.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

H. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

2. Clear anodized finish.

I. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

2.2 EMERGENCY LED POWER UNIT (BATTERY BACKUP)

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire

body and compatible with the driver. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate the luminaire continuously at a minimum output lumen

level as indicated in the fixture schedule on the plans upon loss of normal power. Connect

unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire driver.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate entire luminaire continuously, unless otherwise noted on

the plans.

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and when possible, accessible without

opening luminaire or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.


b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering the

luminaire, remote mounted from luminaire. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate the luminaire continuously at a minimum output lumen

level as indicated in the fixture schedule on the plans. Connect unswitched circuit to

battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire driver.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate entire luminaire continuously, unless otherwise noted on

the plans.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

C. Emergency LED power unit (battery backup) shall be integral to the light fixture under all

circumstances, except when noted on the plans, the physical size of the unit does not fit within

the fixture, or the lumen output is of a larger size where the unit does not fit within the driver

compartment of the fixture.

2.3 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Luminaire Types: See fixture schedule on plans for light fixtures specified.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.


B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Lenses, Diffusers and Globes:

1. Glass Lighting Diffusers: As specified on the light fixture schedule on the plans.

2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.


D. Housings:



E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels

where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles

when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining

components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling

canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless

steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install

new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.


2. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to

120 inches (6 m) in length.

3. Ceiling mount with pendant mount with 5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable

supports adjustable to 120 inches (6 m) in length.

4. Ceiling mount with hook mount.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or

rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION





1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by

Owner.

B. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to

conduct short-duration test.

C. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour

discharge test.


EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 1

SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units.

2. Exit signs.

3. Luminaire supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered

supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting

support.


2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions.

3. Battery and charger for light units.

4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type.

B. Product Schedule:


1. For emergency lighting units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

2. For exit signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.




1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting units.

Furnish at least one of each type.


one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for

Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that


1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace

components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.


1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: Five years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Five years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING



B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to

comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.

F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.

H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory

mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast when required.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp for single lamp fixtures, or two

lamps for multi-lamp fixtures continuously at a minimum output lumen level as indicated

in the fixture schedule on the plans upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched

circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp(s) on when power-supply circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp(s) automatically disconnects from

battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored,

relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated

on charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following


a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F

(40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour

period.

b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and

not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C).

c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing).

d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet (1000 m).

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire

or entering ceiling space.


a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium or lead-acid type, as determined by

the unit manufacturer and as specified in the fixture schedule on the plans.

6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.

B. Emergency Luminaires:

1. Emergency Luminaires: As indicated on Drawings, with the following additional

features:

a. Operating at nominal voltage of 120-277 V ac.

b. Internal or External emergency power unit (battery backup).

c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in

wet locations.

d. UL 94 5VA flame rating.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit:

1. Emergency Lighting Unit: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Operating at nominal voltage of 120-277 V ac, or as specified in the light fixture schedule

on the plans.

3. Wall or ceiling type with universal junction box adaptor.

4. UV stable thermoplastic housing, rated for damp locations.

5. Two Halogen, Krypton, or LED lamp heads.

6. Internal emergency power unit.

D. Remote Emergency Lighting Units:

1. Emergency Lighting Unit: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Operating at nominal voltage that matches that of the unit (exit sign, battery system, etc)

that powers the remote unit.

3. Wall or ceiling type with universal junction box adaptor.

4. UV stable thermoplastic housing, rated for wet locations.

5. One or Two lamp heads as indicated on the drawings.

6. External emergency power unit.


2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Operating at nominal voltage of 120-277 V ac, unless specified otherwise on the light

fixture schedule on the plans.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit when specified

on the light fixture schedule on the plans.

4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and

provide additional capacity for power connection to remote lighting units.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except

omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power

requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit

as a unified system. See light fixture schedule on the plans.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions.

2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools.

3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Lenses, Diffusers and Globes:

1. Glass Lighting Diffusers: As specified on the light fixture schedule on the plans.

2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.


D. Housings:



E. Conduit: Electrical metallic tubing or Flexible metallic conduit, minimum 3/4 inch (21 mm) in

diameter.


2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68

mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting

luminaires will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.

3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent

of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:



2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

G. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or

rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

H. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION





1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service:

1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to

conduct short-duration test.


2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour

discharge test.


LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

SECTION 265619 – LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp

technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.


3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The

adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the

luminaire as applied in this Project.


a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory

with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.

7. Photoelectric relays.

8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable for

components involved.

B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.




1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of

each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering prior

to shipping.


A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire

installation.


B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

E. CRI of minimum 70. CCT as indicated on the fixture schedule on the plans.

F. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.

G. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

H. Internal driver.

I. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac, or as specified in the fixture schedule on the plans.

J. In-line Fusing: When specified on the fixture schedule, provide a separate in-line fuse for each

luminaire.

K. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.

2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Luminaire Types: See fixture schedule on plans for light fixtures specified.


2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping and

sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,

frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and

when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and

other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.


E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.

2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be

located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing

angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard or custom RAL paint applied to factory-assembled and

tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or

support materials.

2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, roofs, and canopy ceilings for suitable conditions where luminaires will be

installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new

lamps.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


B. Install lamps in each luminaire.

C. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

D. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:


E. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

F. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

G. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.


H. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. When fixtures include a photoelectric

device, include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial

light sources, favoring a north orientation.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections

and wiring methods.

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar

metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape

applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION




A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.


1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance

with standards.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and any photocell

relays.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 1

SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grounding conductors.

2. Grounding connectors.

3. Grounding busbars.

4. Grounding rods.

5. Grounding labeling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.

B. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.

C. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.

D. Service Provider: The operator of a service that provides telecommunications transmission

delivered over access provider facilities.



B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans,

elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. As-Built Data: Marked up construction plans showing as-built locations of grounding and

bonding infrastructure, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2. Ground and roof rings.

3. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors.


B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at

Project site.

2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a technician to perform the on-site

inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

C. Comply with TIA-607-B.

2.2 CONDUCTORS



1. Harger Lightning & Grounding.

2. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation,

insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-

strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:

1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches (300 mm). If jumper is a

wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two

crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with

grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.


2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils (14.2 sq. mm), 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4

inch (6.3 mm) in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS



1. Burndy

2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.


4. Panduit Corp.

B. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70

for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply

with UL 486A-486B.

C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor

when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

D. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor

grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed

for the purpose.

E. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type mechanical connector for

main grounding connections, compression-type mechanical connector for all other connections;

with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch (15.8- or 25.4-mm) centers for a two-

bolt connection to the busbar.

F. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS



1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.



B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 by 20

inches (6.3 by 100 by 510 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar

shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with TIA-607-B.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch (100-mm) clearance to

access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.

3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches (6.3 by 50

by 300 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall

mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with TIA-607-B.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch (50-mm) clearance

to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.

3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

D. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting

conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and

complying with TIA-607-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this

Section.

1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware

for attachment to the cabinet.

2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch (483- or 584-

mm) equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack,

and stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inches (1827 or 914 mm) long, with stainless-

steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification products in Section 270553 "Identification for

Communications Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with

requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance

of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.


C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,

and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that

each element is connected to at least two others.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with TIA-607-B.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings

shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.

2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings

shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2 AWG minimum.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

D. Conductor Support:

1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches (900

mm).

E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,

and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the

diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices.

3. Support at not more than 36-inch (900-mm) intervals.

4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch (21-mm) PVC conduit until conduit

enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway

through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless



a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond

the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with

requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and

bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than

No. 3/0 AWG.

3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS

A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated

spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 12 inches (300 mm) above finished floor unless


B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of

doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in

that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.

2. Pretwist the conductor.

3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone

conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding

equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer

conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot (1 sq. mm/linear meter) of conductor

length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.

F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of

enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install top-mounted or

vertically mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with

the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB using No. 2 AWG bonding

conductors.

G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within

the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.


H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications

equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the

panelboard.

I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and

spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced

twisted-pair cables.

J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or

rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding

conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a

supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

K. Access Floors: Bond all metal parts of access floors to the TGB.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier

for the space containing the TMGB.

2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for

the space containing the TGB.

3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point:

"WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT

REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"




1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester,

taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room

containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM.

Conduct tests with the facility in operation.

a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding

electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100

milliohms.

3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not

more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus

2.0 percent.


a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system

electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the

TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify

Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1

SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS – CONDUIT AND BOXES

ONLY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Metallic surface pathways.

5. Nonmetallic surface pathways.

6. Boxes and enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product data for the following:

1. Boxes and enclosures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.

B. Manufacturers: Contractors option.

C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:


1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,

and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated GRC.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

1. Material: Steel.

2. Type: Set screw or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having

jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect

threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Nonmetallic raceway of circular section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.


C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended

location and application. Nonmetallic conduits shall not be used in plenum spaces or

other air handling spaces.


D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.


F. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal trough of rectangular cross section fabricated to required size and

shape, without holes or knockouts, and with hinged or removable covers.


C. General Requirements for Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:

1. Comply with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R as required, unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

2. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.


D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged or screw-cover type, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES

A. Description: Enclosures for communications wiring systems.



1. Crouse-Hinds.

2. Hoffman.

3. MonoSystems, Inc.

4. Thomas & Betts Corp.

C. General Requirements for Boxes and Enclosures:


2. Boxes and enclosures installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations.

3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

4. Device Box Dimensions: Double gang: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm

square by 60 mm deep); single gang: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep

(100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep).

5. Gangable boxes are allowed.


D. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

E. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

A. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or

Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch as project conditions dictate.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

1. Material: Plastic.

2. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

1. Loading dock.


2. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

3. Mechanical rooms.

4. Gymnasiums

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel units in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use set-screw steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA/BICSI 568.

3. TIA-569-D.

4. NECA 101

B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping


D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical

Raceways and Cabling" for sleeves and sleeve seals for communications.

F. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

G. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.


H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

I. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within

12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

J. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

L. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all

directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from nonmetallic conduit and fittings to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, and fittings

before rising above floor.

M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes.

Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.

R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (50-mm) trade size and larger,

use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

S. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end

of pull wire. Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare

alongside pathways in use.


T. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated

on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points.

3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight pathway

section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape

and glue are not acceptable support methods.

U. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

V. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25

feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where

environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C), and that has

straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

1. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change.

2. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change.

3. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

(70 deg C) temperature change.

4. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)

of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and

contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115

mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal

conduits.


4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PENETRATIONS



Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings and finishes from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528.29 - 1

SECTION 270528.29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support systems for communication raceways.

2. Aluminum slotted support systems for communication raceways.

3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems for communication raceways.

4. Conduit and cable support devices.

5. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

6. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

7. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and

hanger rods.

8. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.




and profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.

b. Clamps.

c. Hangers.

d. Sockets.

e. Eye nuts.

f. Fasteners.

g. Anchors.

h. Saddles.

i. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for communications hangers and support

systems.

1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.


2. Steel slotted-channel systems.

3. Aluminum slotted-channel systems.

4. Nonmetallic slotted-channel systems.

5. Equipment supports.

6. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-

(10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface.



the following:

a. B-Line

b. Haydon Corp.

c. Thomas & Betts

d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.


3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.


5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.




MFMA-4.




B. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded aluminum channels and angles with minimum

13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one

surface.




the following:

a. Cooper Industries, Inc.

b. Haydon Corp.

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.

d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.


3. Channel Material: 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.

4. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy.





MFMA-4.




C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8

inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least one surface.



the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit

b. B-Line.

c. Haydon Corp.



4. Fittings and Accessories: Products provided by channel and angle manufacturer and

designed for use with those items.

5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as those for channels and angles.

6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.



D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel clamps, hangers, and associated fittings, designed for

types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored communications conductors or

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.


F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for





1) Hilti, Inc


3) MKT Fastening, LLC

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel for use in hardened

portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for





1) B-Line

2) Hilti, Inc.


3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers

and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:


1. NECA 1.

2. NECA/BICSI 568.

3. TIA-569-D.

4. NECA 101

5. NECA 105.

6. NECA 111.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping


C. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for

Communications Systems."

D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm)

in diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems

above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

communications items and their supports to building structural elements by the following

methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Use approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion

anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated-driven threaded studs, provided with lock

washers and nuts, may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)

thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs

less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.


6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with

MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means

that comply with anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor communications materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING

270544 - 1

SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal

joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.


CABLING

270544 - 2

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, where allowed by the AHJ.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms, where allowed by the

AHJ.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3

mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one

or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5

mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and pathway or cable.



the following:

a. 3M




2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.



the following:


CABLING

270544 - 3

a. 3M




2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.


CABLING

270544 - 4

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm)

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for

installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or

cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.


IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 - 1

SECTION 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for labels and signs.

2. Labels.

3. Bands and tubes.

4. Tapes.

5. Signs.

6. Cable ties.

7. Fasteners for labels and signs.




and profiles, and finishes for communications identification products.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate composition, size, colors, lettering style,

mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule:

1. Outlets: Scaled drawings indicating location and proposed designation.

2. Backbone Cabling: Riser diagram showing each communications room, backbone cable,

and proposed backbone cable designation.

3. Racks: Scaled drawings indicating location and proposed designation.

4. Patch Panels: Enlarged scaled drawings showing rack row, number, and proposed

designations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 70 and TIA 606-B.


B. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

C. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material

surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS– PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Equipment Identification Labels:


2.3 LABELS– PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.



the following:

a. Brady Corp



B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with

diameters sized to suit diameters of raceway or cable they identify, that stay in place by

gripping action.



the following:

a. Brady Corp



C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, polyester flexible

labels with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.



the following:

a. Brady Corp




2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating protective

shields over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed

legend.

3. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor,

weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and

location.



the following:

a. Brady Corp



2. Minimum Nominal Size:

a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches (37 by 150 mm) for raceway and conductors.

b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) for equipment.

c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES– PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2

inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceway or cable they identify,

that stay in place by gripping action.



the following:

a. Brady Corp



2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE



1. Brady Corp

2. Brother International



B. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

C. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, and ANSI Z535.4.

2. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE".

D. Tag: Type ID:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid

aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of

the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of

the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).

3. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).

4. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).

5. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).

6. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N) and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa).

2.6 SIGNS– PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:



the following:

a. Carlton Industries, LP.


2. Preprinted aluminum signs, high-intensity reflective, punched or drilled for fasteners,

with colors, legend, and size required for application.



B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:



the following:


a. Brady Corp


2. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-

inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors,

legend, and size required for application.



C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:



the following:

a. Brady Corp


2. Engraved legend.

3. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.

c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in

corners for mounting.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.7 CABLE TIES



1. Hellermann Tyton


3. Marking Services, Inc.

B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and

Type 6/6 nylon.



MPa).


4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,

self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.




MPa).


4. Color: Black.

D. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa).

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying communications identification products,

clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods

recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation

and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.


F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance

of communications systems and connected items.

G. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

H. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive

appropriate to the location and substrate.

3. Provide label 6 inches (150 mm) from cable end.

I. Snap-Around Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.


J. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.


K. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,

schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.


letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels


L. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

M. Underground-Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly

above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

2. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

N. Cable Ties: General purpose, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.


3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE– PER OUTAGAMIE COUNTY STANDARDS

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to

provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points,

and locations with high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify covers of each junction

and pull box with self-adhesive labels containing wiring system legend.

1. System legends shall be as follows:

a. Telecommunications.

D. Faceplates: Label individual faceplates with self-adhesive labels. Place label at top of faceplate.

Each faceplate shall be labeled with its individual, sequential designation, composed of the

following, in the order listed:

1. Wiring closet designation.

2. Colon.

3. Faceplate number.

E. Equipment Room Labeling:

1. Racks, Frames, and Enclosures: Identify front and rear of each with self-adhesive labels.

2. Data Outlets: Label each outlet with a self-adhesive label indicating the following, in the

order listed:

a. Room number being served.

b. Colon.

c. Faceplate number.

F. Horizontal Cables: Label each cable with a vinyl-wraparound label snap-around label indicating

the following, in the order listed:

1. Room number.

2. Colon.

3. Faceplate number.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for copper, coaxial, hybrid

copper/fiber, and optical-fiber cable.

H. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures: Self-adhesive labels.

1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

J. Equipment Identification Labels:


1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated-acrylic or melamine-plastic sign.

3. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Communications cabinets.

b. Computer room air conditioners.

c. Fire-alarm and suppression equipment.

d. Egress points.

e. Power distribution components.



311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping, or sealing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.


311000 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations.


311000 - 3

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner and Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, and utilities sections; and in 024119 "Selective Demolition."

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

2. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.


311000 - 4

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, pavements, and turf and grasses. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete pavements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

C. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

G. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

H. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.


312000 - 2

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

B. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously


312000 - 3

inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.


312000 - 4

3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.8 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.


312000 - 5

3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

3.11 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.

3.12 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.


312000 - 6

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Concrete Paving.



B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, flat sheet.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60; deformed.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.


321313 - 2

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.


A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, gray portland cement Type I or Type II.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94/C94M.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.


A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.


321313 - 3

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.


321313 - 4

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Control Joints: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-

finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.


321313 - 5

C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.

2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel-wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing or moisture-retaining-cover curing.

3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet-long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.9 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


321313 - 6


Outagamie County Department of Recycling and Solid Waste M&E Project No. 1-0915-005 Material Recovery Facility Expansion

329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Seeding.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

B. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.


A. Certification of grass seed.

B. Product certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.


329200 - 2

B. Seed Species:

1. Quality, State Certified: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below: a. 50 percent Kentucky Bluegrass (Poa Pratensis). b. 25 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety) c. 25 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne)

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil.

B. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.


329200 - 3

1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose thickness over seeded areas.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.

3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

3.4 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.



401200 - 1

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS PIPING Section 40 12 00 Compressed Air Process Piping PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Piping Materials:

1. Copper Tube 2. Aluminum

C. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Pipe shall comply with ASME B31.1. B. Brazing - Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ANSI B31.5,

paragraph 527.5 for shop and jobsite brazing of piping work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions for each type of pipe, tube, and fitting used on project.


A. Provide pipe and tube through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube.

B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to

store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Copper Tube:

1. Copper Tube - ANSI/ASTM B 88; Type M as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Rigid Aluminum Pipe:

1. Aluminum pipe shall be manufactured of AW-6060 T51 or AW-6063 T5 PER ASTM

8241.


401200 - 2

2. Pipe shall be powder coated. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Parker Transair b. Duratec Airline c. Approved equal

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Soldering Materials

1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. 2. Silver Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96.5TS.

2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Provide supports and anchors complying in accordance with the following listing:


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment.

B. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

C. Locating piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to

drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams or details.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are

copper plated, or plastic coated. The use of duct tape or electricians tape is not acceptable. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEM JOINT

A. Copper - Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recog-nized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean out-side of tube ends and inside of tube fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

B. Aluminum – Connectors shall have Gripping or Snap Ring technology with threaded release

nut.


401200 - 3

3.03 PIPING TESTS

A. Test pressure in accordance with ANSI B31.

END SECTION


412223 - 1

SECTION 412223 - HOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Monorail and Hoist System in New Maintenance Room.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI MH 27.1, Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems.

B. ANSI B30.16, Safety Standard for Overhead Hoists (Underhung).

C. ANSI B30.11, Safety Standards for Monorails and Underhung Cranes.

D. ASME HST-4M, Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists.

E. ASME NOG-1, Rules for Construction of Overhead and Gantry Cranes.

F. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electric Code, Article 610, Cranes and Hoists.


A. Shop Drawings: 1. Monorail system, including attachment to structure. 2. Electric wiring and control system. 3. Installation details.

B. Product Data

1. Monorail track system. 2. Hoist. 3. Trolley.


A. Sample warranty.



B. Test reports of the completed crane and system.


412223 - 2


A. Load chain certificates 1. Submit factory certification of load chain rated capacity. 2. Certification that the hoist, hook, and trolley system design and fabrication is in

compliance with all listed standards.

B. Pre-Erection Inspection 1. Before erection, the contractor and manufacturer’s representative shall jointly inspect the

monorail and hoist systems and components at the job site to determine compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s data and shop drawings as approved.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s lifetime warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MONORAIL HOIST SYSTEM

A. Basis of Design: ECMT-4016, 2 ton hoist with motorized trolley by Coffing Hoists.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 013000.

C. Hoist: 1. Minimum lifting capacity: 2 tons. 2. Minimum lifting speed: 15 FPM.

D. Trolley: 1. Motor driven with minimum travel speed of 4 FPM. 2. Sized to fit American Standard I-Beams, wide-flange and patented track beams. 3. Machined, cast-iron wheels with sealed, lifetime lubricated ball bearings.

E. Upper and lower limit switches.

F. Hook with safety latch.

G. Power requirements 1. Track electrification shall be accomplished by UL approved cable. 2. Comply with the provisions of ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, Article 610, for

wiring. 3. All controls shall be housed in a single NEMA 4/12 enclosure 4. A fused, manual disconnect switch with a lockable handle mounted through the panel

door shall be provided and wired into the incoming power circuit. 5. All electrical equipment shall meet NEMA 1 requirements. 6. Controls:

a. Controls shall be a single pendant. b. Pendant shall be push button marked to each function:

1) “Up,” “Down,” “Forward,” and “Reverse.”


412223 - 3

H. End Trucks: 1. End trucks consisting of structural steel weldments bolted directly to the rail member

forming a rigid and square connection. 2. Safety lugs shall limit drop of end truck to not more than one inch in the event of wheel

yoke, axle or load bar failures. Place safety lugs on both sides of the rail so that if failure occurs the rail is centrally loaded about the vertical axis.

I. Brakes: 1. Hoisting brakes:

a. In accordance with Hoist Manufacturer’s Institute specifications and ANSI B30.16 Safety Standards for Overhead Hoists (Underhung).

2. Brakes supplied for carrier and crane travel shall conform to ANSI B30.11 Safety Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. 2. All materials delivered to the site have been fabricated in accordance with the approved

shop drawings and are free from obvious shipping damage or defects. 3. Beginning the installation means the installer accepts the existing surfaces and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent equipment, materials, and piping against damage from installation.

B. Preparatory work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions shall be completed prior to equipment installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Work in this Section in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions, shop drawings, and directions of the manufacturer representative.

B. The hoist manufacturer shall be responsible for the design of the connection of the equipment to the hoist beams as shown on the plans.

C. Electrical work required shall be in accordance with Division 26.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: 1. The manufacturer shall provide a qualified representative to inspect the completed

installation, service and operate the equipment under all design conditions with a


412223 - 4

contractor furnished test weight, instruct the Owner’s personnel in proper operating and maintenance procedures, and provide Owner with a written certificate of approval. The representative shall submit a report for each site visit.
